V- "
i' '•
  EPA-230/3-76-001
  November 1975
                  ESTIMATION OF THE COST OF CAPITAL

                  FOR MAJOR UNITED STATES INDUSTRIES

        WITH APPLICATION TO POLLUTION CONTROL INVESTMENTS
                        Contract No. 68-01-2848
                    Environmental Protection Agency
                    Office of Planning and Evaluation
                      Economic Analysis Division

-------
        ESTIMATION OF THE COST OF CAPITAL



       FOR MAJOR UNITED STATES INDUSTRIES



WITH APPLICATION TO POLLUTION-CONTROL INVESTMENTS
               Dr. Gerald A. Pogue



                 4 Summit Drive



            Manhasset, New York 11030
                  November 1975

-------
             ESTIMATION OF THE COST OF CAPITAL

            FOR MAJOR UNITED STATES INDUSTRIES

     WITH APPLICATION TO POLLUTION-CONTROL INVESTMENTS



                     TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section
Paee
PREFACE	   x



                      PART 1.  THEORY



    I     INTRODUCTION	1-1

          (a)   Background and Purpose of Study ......  1-1

   II     ORGANIZATION OF THE REPORT	-  1-3



         PART 2.  THEORY: COST OF CAPITAL CONCEPTS


    I     INTRODUCTION   	  2-1

   II     THE COST OF CAPITAL FOR AN "ALL-EQUITY" FIRM   .  .  2-2

          (a)   Definition	  2-2

          (b)   Decision Rules	  2-5

  III     SECURITY VALUATION THEORY FOR ESTIMATING
          THE COST OF EQUITY CAPITAL	  2-8

   IV     THE WEIGHTED AVERAGE COST OF CAPITAL	2-15

          (a)   The Effects  of Leverage on the Market
                Value of the Firm	  2  15

          (b)   The Weighted Average Cost of Capital   .  .  .  2-24

          (c)   Relationship Between p* and Leverage   .  .  .  2-3(


                             ii

-------
               TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)
Section                                                     Page
          PART 2 — APPENDIX A:  DEVELOPMENT OF
          SECURITY VALUATION MODELS 	 	   !-41

          FOOTNOTES FOR PART 2	   2-45
         PART 3.  THEORY: RISK AND RETURN CONCEPTS
    1     INTRODUCTION  	  3-1

   II     A BRIEF INTRODUCTION TO THE THEORY OF
          RISK AND THE REQUIRED RATE OF RETURN	  3-3

          (a)   The Risk of Individual Common Stocks  ...   i-3

          (b)   Basic Risk-Return Concepts: The Capital
                Asset Pricing Model	  3-13

  III     RISK AND THE REQUIRED RATE OF RETURN	  3-18

   IV     THE RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN REAL AND
          FINANCIAL MEASURES OF RISK	  3-49

          (a)   Empirical Studies on the Real Determinants
                of Beta (Through Mid-1973)  	  3-51

                Footnotes for S. C. Myers1 Article  ....  3-78

                References for Excerpt from
                S. C. Myers' Article    	3-80

          (b)   Recent Studies	  3-83

          (c)   Summary	  3-88

          FOOTNOTES FOR PART 3	  3-92
                    PART 4.  ESTIMATION


    I     INTRODUCTION  	   4-1

   II     METHODOLOGY	   4-2


                            iii

-------
               TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued}
Section                                                   Page

          (a)    Combining the Cost of Capital and
                Risk-Return Models  	  4-2

          (bj    Estimation Equation (1-3) 	  4-5

          (c)    Model 4—The Long-Run Risk-Return Line.  .  4-9

          (d)    Cross-Sectional Regression Procedures  .  .  4-11

          (ej    Combining the Results of Models
                1 through 4	4-14

  III     DEFINITION OF THE PRIMARY AND SECONDARY
          SAMPLES	  4-16

   IV     MEASUREMENT OF EQUITY RISK	4-19

          (aj    Calculation of Betas	4-19

    V     COST OF EQUITY CAPITAL:   EMPIRICAL RESULTS   .  .  4-24

          (a)    Variable Estimation for Cross-Sectional
                Regression Models  1, 2, and 3	4-24

          (b)    Estimation of Weights for Cross-
                Sectional Regression Equations  	  4-27

          (c)    Weighted Regression Results 	  4-29

          (d)    The Cost of Equity Capital:  Results.  .  .  4-35

   VI     THE  WEIGHTED AVERAGE COST OF CAPITAL:
          EMPIRICAL RESULTS 	  4 42

          (a)    The Cost of Debt and Preferred
                Stock Capital	4-42

          (b)    The Capital Structure Proportions ....  4-44

          (c)    The Weighted Average Cost of Capital   .  .  4-46

  VII     FORECASTING THE WEIGHTED AVERAGE COST
          OF CAPITAL	  4-52

          FOOTNOTES FOR PART 4	4-58
                            IV

-------
               TABLE OF CONTENTS  (ContinuedJ
                  PART 5.  APPLICATIONS
Section                                                   Page
    I     INTRODUCTION  	  5-1

   II     CAPITAL BUDGETING 	  5-2

          (a)   The Weighted Average Cost of Capital   .  .  5-2

          (c)   The All-Equity Cost of Capital	5-7

  III     MEASURING THE FINANCIAL IMPACT OF INVESTMENTS
          IN POLLUTION-CONTROL DEVICES  	  5-12

          (a)   A Financial Impact Index  	  5-12

          (t>)   The Risk and Financing of Pollution-
                Control Investments

          (cj   The Offset Rate of Return	  5-20

          (d)   Example	  5-23

          FOOTNOTES FOR PART 5	5-28



REFERENCES	R-l
                             v

-------
             ESTIMATION OF THE COST 01-' CAPITAL

            FOR MAJOR UNITED STATliS I NDUSTR] I-S

     WITH APPLICATION TO POLLUTION-CONTROL INVESTMENTS



                      LIST OF TABLES



         PART 2.   THEORY:' COST OF CAPITAL CONCEPTS



Table No.                                .                 Page

  2-1     The Relationship Between the Earnings Price
          Ratio and Reinvestment Rates of Return  ....  2-12

  2-2     Financial Leverage—Example	  2-19

  2-3     Necessary and Sufficient Conditions for
          Cost-of-Capital Formulas	  2-35

  2-4     Calculation of the Weighted  Average Cost
          of Capital:  Example	  2 39



         PART 3.   THEORY: RISK AND RETURN CONCEPTS
  3-1     Risk Versus Diversification:  Randomly
          Selected Portfolios 	  3-5
                    PART 4.   ESTIMATION
  4-1     Definition of Sample Sizes
          Number of Companies	  4-18

  4-2     Stock Risk and Capital Structure Data
          Primary Group Averages  ...  	  4-22

  4-3     Stock Risk and Capital Structure Data
          Secondary Group AVerages	  4-23
                            VI

-------
                LIST OF TABLES (Continued)
Table No.                                                    Page

  4-4     Weighted Regression Coefficients —
          Model 1	4-30

  4-5     Weighted Regression Coefficients —
          Model 2	4-31

  4-6     Weighted Regression Results —
          Model 3	4-33

  4-7     Model 3 Iteration Summary 	  4-34

  4-8     Parameters for Model 4	  4-36

  4-9     Relationship Between Cost of Equity Capital
          and Beta Resulting from Combining
          Models 1 through 4	'	4-37

  4-10    Cost of Equity Capital (% Per Year):
          Year End 1971   1974 — Primary Groups	4-38

  4-11    Weighted Average Cost of Capital (I Per Year):
          Year End 1971 - 1974 — Primary Groups	4-48

  4-12    Projected Weighted Average Cost of Capital
          (I Per Year): Year End 1975 - 1984 — Primary
          Groups	4-55

  4-13    Weighted Average Cost of Capital (I Per Year)
          — Secondary Groups 	  4-56
                   PART 5.  APPLICATIONS
  5-1     Possible Risk and Capital Structure Consider-
          ations for Pollution-Control Investments   ....  5 17

  5-2     Adjusted Present Value for Example Pollution-
          Control Investment	  5-21

  5-2     Example: The Impact  of Pollution-Control
          Investments on Firms of Different Size	5-25
                            VII

-------
              ESTIMATION OF THIi COST OF CAPITAL

             FOR MAJOR UNITED STATES INDUSTRIES

      WITH APPLICATION TO POLLUTION-CONTROL INVESTMENTS



                LIST OF FIGURES AND EXHIBITS
Figure/Exhibit
    Number                                                 Page

     2-1       Impact  of leverage  on  the  value of
               the firm ,	   2-25

     2-2       Effects  of  financial  leverage  on costs
               of debt  and equity  financing  and the
               weighted average  cost  of capital 	   2-37
         PART 3,   THEORY:  RISK AND  RETURN CONCEPTS
     3-1        Systematic  versus  unsystematic  risk  .  .  .   3-7

     3-2        Calculation of  a  security's  market
               sensitivity index  from  past  data	   3-9

     3-3        Results  of  Black,  Jensen  and Scholes
               Study—Average  monthly  returns  versus
               systematic  risk for  the 35-year period
               1931  1965  for  ten  portfolios and  the
               market portfolio  	   3-15

     3-4        Scatter  diagram:  market beta versus
               accounting  beta	   3-86
                    PART 4.   ESTIMATION
     4-1        Normalized regression  weights
               versus  beta	4-28

     4 2        Pooled  estimated cost  of equity capital
               versus  beta	4-40
                            VI 11

-------
          LIST OF FIGURES AND EXHIBITS  (Continued)
Figure/Exhibit
Number
4-
i _
4-
3
4
5
Error
versus
Pooled
versus
Error
estima
range
beta
estir
beta
range
te vei
for
nated
for
rsus
pooled
total
pooled
beta .
equity estimate
cost of capital
total cost
Pa
4-
4-
4-
ge
41
49
51
                   PART 5.  APPLICATIONS
     5-1       Plot of impact index versus firm size
               for Table 5-3 example	5-27
                              IX

-------
                          PRIiFACH
      In this report  I  have attempted to draw together a



number of elements of capital markets and corporate finance



theories in order to derive new procedures for estimating



the costs of capital for major United States industries.  The



report presents no new theory; instead, the major task lias



been to combine and apply existing theories to practical esti



mation and decision problems.



      The major part of the report is concerned with the cost



of capital estimation methodology and empirical results.  In



addition, I have begun the development of an analytical framework



for analyzing the economic impact on corporations of mandated



investment programs in pollution-control devices.  My approach



combines the cost of capital estimates with capital budgeting



procedures to produce Financial Impact Indices of the effect



on corporations of pollution control requirements.   However, no



attempt has been made to present a detailed analysis of this



question, but rather to point the direction in which the



analysis might fruitfully proceed.




      The report deals with many concepts from finance theory,



some of which are relatively new.  I have tried to  make the



report reasonably self contained by including two lengthy parts



dealing with the relevant theoretical background;  Part 2 deals



with the cost of capital theory, Part 3 with modern portfolio
                             x

-------
and capital markets theories.  However, even these discussions

assume some prior knowledge of financial management concepts.

It is assumed that the reader has had a course in financial

management of about the level of the  ames C. Van Home text

(Financial Management and Policy, Second Edition, Prentice Hall,

1971J or the J. Fred Western and Eugene Brigham text (Managerial

Finance, Fourth Edition, Holt Rinehart § Winston, 1972).  For

those without this background, particularly diligent reading of

Parts 2 and 3 will be necessary.  In addition, since the cost

of capital estimation procedures use econometric models, some

knowledge of basic econometrics and statistics would be helpful.

A particularly good source is the J. Johnston text (Econometric

Methods, Second Edition, McGraw-Hill, 1972).

      In the conduct of the research and the writing of this

report, I have relied heavily on the writings of my former

colleague, Professor Stewart C. Myers of MIT.  Professor Myers

has done much pathbreaking research in the corporate-finance

area.  I have relied particularly on his writings in the cost

of-capital and capital-budgeting areas.  This research has

also benefited from my private conversations with Professor

Robert Litzenberger of Stanford University.

      Finally, I would like to express my appreciation to my

research associate Mai Pogue, to my research assistants C. Nguyen

and M. Castellino, and to Anna Beliveau who has diligently typed

the drafts of this report and provided valuable  editorial

assistance.

                                   Gerald A. Pogue
                                   Manhasset, New York
                                   November 1975

                             xi

-------
ESTIMATION OF THE COST OF CAPITAL



FOR MAJOR UNITED STATES INDUSTRIES



  WITH APPLICATION TO POLLUTION-



       CONTROL INVESTMENTS
    PART 1.    INTRODUCTION
      Dr. Gerald A. Pogue



        4 Summit Drive



   Manhasset, New York 11030
         November 1975

-------
                    I.  INTRODUCTION








(a)  Background and Purpose of Study



     The cost of capital has long be-^n recognized as an



important ingredient in financial decision-making.  In capital



budgeting, for example, it permits the condensation of a stream



of future cash flows into a single figure of merit for an



investment project or strategy—its discounted present value.



The cost-of-capital concept is prominent in both the literature



and practice of finance:  textbook definitions abound; the term



is common in management conversations.



     The application of the concept in practice, however, is



not at all simple  or straightforward.  While much agreement



exists regarding the general concept, less exists as to how



the cost of capital should be measured and applied in practice.



While part of the difficulty lies in the abstraction of the



usual definitions, the major problem stems from the lack of



simple and reliable estimation procedures.



     Most of the past academic studies of cost of capital have



focussed on public utilities.  This was due in part to the



regulated nature of the utility industry  (and thus the public



interest and availability of data) and in part to the risk



structure of the industry.  As most public utilities face



reasonably similar investment risks, the industry could be



approximately considered as made up of companies of similar
                           1-1

-------
risk, thus sidestepping the difficult question of how 1 he



cost of capital varied with investment risk.



     The purpose of this study is to estimate capital costs



for a broad cross-section of American industries.  As such,



it is one of the first empirical studies to explicitly



consider differences in investment risk.  To  achieve this end,



the study combines traditional security valuation approaches



to estimation of capital costs with rrpdern capital markets



theory to develop new estimation procedures which reflect th'



current state of finance theory.



     While the procedures used in this study  represent improve-



ments over previous studies,  they must 'not be considered as



either infallible or the final word on the subject.   Finance



theory is evolving rapidly and new methods for estimating



capital costs will undoubtedly appear.  Nevertheless, while



the final answer to the estimation probleip is not available



(and will not be for some time), a great deal is known upon



which to base useful estimates of capital costs.



     In conjunction with micro-economic analyses being performed



for and by the Environmental  Protection Agency,  cost-of-capital



estimates are produced for six basic industry groups: pulp and



paper, chemicals, petroleum refining, iron and steel, non-ferrou:



metals, and utilities.  Estimates were made as of the year-ends



1971 through 1974 and projections prepared for each year of the



1975-1984 period.  The estimates include the  cost of equity



capital and the weighted average cost of capital.
                            1-2

-------
              II.   ORGANIZATION OF THE REPORT
      The report is divided into five parts.   Part 2 presents



the relevant cost-of-capital concepts which underlie the



estimation procedures.  Section I contains a definition of the



cost of equity capital.  Section II describes three related



discounted cash flow security valuation models which are used



to estimate the cost of equity capital.  Section III deals with



the impact of debt financing on the market value of the firm and



procedures  for  measuring the weighted average cost of capital.



      Part 3 summarizes the necessary capital markets and port-



folio theory concepts.  Sections II and III discuss how the risk



of common stocks can be measured, and how risk is related to the



cost of capital.  Section IV summarizes the empirical literature



on the relationship between stock-market-oriented risk measures



and the accounting characteristics of firms'  assets.



      Part 4 presents the cost-of-capital estimation methodology



and empirical results.  Section II shoivs how the discounted



cash flow cost of capital models and the risk-return concepts



of Parts 2 and 3, respectively, can be combined to produce



cross-sectional estimation equations.  Section III describes



the primary and secondary company samples used in the study.



Section IV presents the equity risk measures for sample firms.



Section V describes the procedures used to estimate the cross-
                            1-3

-------
sectional regression variables and presents the cost of



equity capital estimates.   Section VI contains the methodology



used to estimate weighted  average costs of capital and presents



the results.   Finally,  Section VII shows how the weighted



costs are likely to change during the 1975-34 period given



estimates of future interest rates.



     The purpose of Part 5 is to show how the cost-of-capital



estimates developed in  Part 4 can be used for making capital



budgeting decisions in  practical situations.   Section II



reviews and extends the capital budgeting procedures intro-



duced in Part 2,   Section  III begins the development of



analytical procedures which can be used for measuring the



financial impact on corporations of investments in pollution-



control devices.
                         1-4

-------
    ESTIMATION OF THE COST OF CAPITAL



   FOR MAJOR UNITED  STATES INDUSTRIES



     WITH APPLICATION TO POLLUTION-



           CONTROL INVESTMENTS
PART 2.   THEORY: COST OF CAPITAL CONCEPTS
           Dr. Gerald A. Pogue



             4 Summit Drive



        Manhasset, New York 11030
             November 1975

-------
                     I.  INTRODUCTION
      The purpose of Part 2 is to present the relevant cost-



of-capital concepts underlying the models and estimation



procedures of Part 4.



      Section II contains definitions of the cost of capital.



For ease of exposition it is assumed in Section II that the



firms under consideration are all-equity financed.  The defini-



tion is broadened later to include debt financing (See Section



IV).



      In Section III three related "discounted cash flow"



security valuation models are discussed.  The models provide



the basic framework for estimating the firm's cost of equity



capital.



      Section IV deals with the impact of debt financing on



the market value of the firm and generalizes the cost-of-



capital definitions and Net Present Value (NPV) decision rules



to include the effects of debt financing.
                            2-1

-------
           II.   THE COST OF CAPITAL FOR AN

                   "ALL-EQUITY" FIRM



(a)  Definition


     The cost of capital for an all-equity-financed company

is the rate of return that investors expect to earn on the

company's securities, as well a,s on al} other securities of

equivalent risk.  The expected rates of return on securities

of equivalent risk must be equal.   If one security offers a

higher rate of return than other equivalent risk securities ,

then there will be excess demand for this security and excess

supplies of the others.  Conversely, a security offering a
                                                          /
relatively low return will be in excess supply.   Prices rise

when there is an excess demand and fall when there is an

excess supply.   Thus prices of equivalent risk securities

will tend to adjust so that they will offer the same ex-

pected rate of return.

     The cost of capital is the minimuiji acceptable rate of

return or "hurdle rate" for new investments by the firm.

The logic in developing a cost of capital on an all-equity-

financed firm's investment goes as follows:

     1.  The firm is one of a class with similar risk

         characteristics—Call this class "j".
                          2-2

-------
     2.  At any point  in time there is a unique expected
         rate of return prevailing in capital markets for
         this degree of risk—call it R..
     3.  The share price of the fi: m in question will
         adjust so that it offers  an expected rate of
         return R- to  investors.
     4.  This rate, the shareholders' opportunity cost,
         should be the minimum acceptable expected rate
         of return on  new investment, assuming the projects
         under consideration have  risk characteristics
         similar to currently held assets.
 (Suppose the firm undertakes investments offering less than R.;
 its shareholders will  be worse off than if the firm had fore-
 gone the investment and paid an extra dividend, since the
 shareholders can always invest at  R..  On the other hand,
 investors can obtain no more than  R. by investing directly,
 so the firm should never pass up investments offering more
 than R..)
     For any stock in  risk class j, the cost of equity capital
 is formally defined by the relation

                  Dt+l   + Pt+l i
          ?tJ  =       1  +  R.                           (2"1J

where
     P .   =  ex-dividend price of  the stock at the end of
             period t
                          2-3

-------
                                                      2

     D          dividends expected during period t+1



     P    .      expected ex-dividend price for t+1




Of course, it is not literally true that everyone has the



same expectations of future return, but for  purposes of



analysis this is assumed so that it is permissible to speak of



"the market's" expectations.



     The above logic must be  extended when the project under



consideration has risk characteristics different from currently



held assets.   Suppose the project under consideration has



risk characteristics more like firms in risk class k.  For



example, assume a paper company is considering expanding into



the chemical  business.   In this case,  the stockholder's oppor-



tunity cost  for this investment is R, , the going rate of return



of firms in  risk class k.  Thus,  the rate R,  should be used



to discount  projects of this  type.



     For investments in risk  class k,  the cost of equity



capital can  be formally defined by extending Equation (2-1).




                    ADt + l + APt + l
                              t + 1
                    _ _ _
              t         1  +  R                          --



where


       APt  =  the change  in the  price  at time t due to the



               adoption of the project  in risk class k



       ADt  =  the expected  incremental cash flow from



               adopting the  project



     APt+l  =  cnanSe  in price at time  t+1 due to the



               adoption of the project
                          2-4

-------
     The cost of capital, as defined above, is relatively



straightforward.  The underlying proposition is that at any



point in time securities are so priced that all securities



of equivalent risk (i.e., all securities in a risk class)



offer the same expected rate of return.  For a given stock,



however, the basic problem is to determine the expected rate



of return for the class in which the stock falls, that is,



estimating the rates prevailing in the market.  There is no



simple way of doing this;  measurement of expectations is




intrinsically difficult.  The security valuation theory which




permits estimation of stockholders' required returns is



presented in Section III.








(b)  Decision Rules




     The premise in finance theory is that corporate managers



will make decisions in order to increase the wealth of the



owners of the firm.  In other words, the corporation is assumed



to be run primarily for the long-run benefit of the common



stockholders.  The decision rules proposed by the theory are



designed to help achieve that end.  The cost-of-capital concept



is no exception.



     Consider first a firm which is all-equity financed. The



cost of capital for such a firm is the rate of return that



investors expect to earn on the company's common stock, as



well as all other securities of equivalent risk.   (The expected
                           2-5

-------
rate of return on all securities of equivalent risk must be



equal.)  ThJs rate is the stockholders' opportunity cost,



since they can always expect to earn this rate by investing



in other firms of comparable risk.



     Thus, the cost of capital is the minimum acceptable rate



of return, or "hurdle rate", for new investments by the firm.



If the firm were to undertake an investment with rate of return



less than the cost of capital, its  shareholders would be worse



off than if the firm had foregone the investment and paid an



extra dividend, since the stockholders can always invest else-



where and earn the cost of capital.   On the other hand,



investors can expect to earn no more than the cost of capital



by investing elsewhere (at the same  risk level), so the firm



should never pass  up investments offering more than the cost



of capital.



     Thus, a decision rule to increase stockholder wealth is



to accept all projects which offer  an internal rate of return



(IRR) greater than the cost of equity capital (R).   That is





          Accept  Project if IRR > R                     (2-3)






     Another version of this rule is to accept all projects



for which the sum of all future cash flows discounted at the



cost of capital exceeds the investment.  The difference



between discounted benefits and costs is called the net



present value (NPV) of the project
                           2-6

-------
          NPV  =       —-^     I                      (2-4)
                  t=l  (1+R)

where

     C   =  the expected project cash flow in year t

     In  =  the investment  (assumed to be made at t = 0)

     T   =  the economic lifetime of the project

     R   =  the cost of  (equity) capital


          Accept Project if NPV > 0                      (2-5)-


     When the firm has both debt and equity financing,  the

goal is the same.  Accept only projects which will increase

stockholder wealth.  The NPV decision rule will be generalized

in Section  IV  to include debt financing.
                           2-7

-------
     III.   SECURITY VALUATION THEORY  FOR  ESTIMATING



              THE COST OF EQUITY  CAPITAL








     The usual approach to estimating the cost of  equity




capital is through the use of various security valuation




models.  The valuation models relate the cost of equity capital




to the expected future dividends on the firm's outstanding




stock.  The rate of return implicit in this stream of




dividends  is that discount rate which equates the present




value of the dividends to the current share price.




     The general form of the valuation model will  be considered




first, followed by the three specific forms -used in this  study.








General Form




     The basic discounted-cash-f low model for security valua-




tion follows directly from Equation (2-1).   The current price




PO (the subscript j  is now unnecessary)  is  given by



                 D  + P

          p   =   -± _ £

           0     (1  + R)



It similarly follows  from Equation (2-1)  that PI can be replace



by (D  + P?)/(l  + R) .   Therefore,
     t-t    C->
          P°
                          (1
If the substitution is continued for P2, P3, etc., we obtain




                         Dt

          P°  =                                         (2-6)

-------
Equation  (2-6) states that the current common stock  share




price is the present value of the stream of future expected




dividends, where the discount rate  (the cost of equity




capital) reflects both the time va]ue of money and the




riskiness of the stream.




     The discounted-cash-flow method is useful because it is




often possible to arrive at reasonable estimates of the firm's




dividend stream.  Since Pn is known, estimates of D-,  D? •  •  •
                         U                         J_  i->



yields an estimate of R.  Three simplifications of Equation




 (2-6) which permit reasonably straightforward estimation of




future dividends will now be considered.








Perpetual-Growth Model



     Suppose the dividend stream D  is expected to grow




indefinitely at some rate g which is less than R.  Then




Equation  (2-6) can be simplified to





                   D
          1 0     R   g                                   ^  ' >



Therefore,



                D,

          R  =  JT-  +  g                                 (2-8)

                 0



That is, the cost of capital will be equal to the dividend



yield plus the growth rate if the stated assumption  is  correct.




(See Appendix A of Part 2 for the development of Equation  (2-7).)



     For companies for which a constant long-term trend  in



earnings and dividends is realistic  (for example, utilities),
                          2-9

-------
Equation (2-8) can be a reasonable rule of thumb for esti
mating R.
     For some companies, however, if Equation (2-8) is applied
in a mechanical way, the estimates of R will be upward biased.
Companies in their early stages typically have a period of
rapid growth of earnings and dividends followed by a much
slower growth rate as they enter maturity (for example, IBM).
During this period of rapid growth,  if estimates of future
growth rates are mechanically produced from past trends,  the
estimated g will overstate the market's expectations.   The
result will be an upward-biased estimate of R.
     It is often stated that estimates produced from
Equation (2-8) based on mechanical extrapolations of past
trends tend to overstate the cost of capital.  This view is
based on the assumption that future  growth rates will  tend to
be less than or equal to historical  rates;  non-mature
companies will mature (i.e., their real growth opportunities
will diminish) and mature companies  will continue or expire.
If this view is correct, then estimates of R from Equation  (2-8)
can be considered as maximum values  for the cost of equity
capital.

No-"Real"-Growth Model
     Consider next the case where all future earnings  not
paid out as dividends are reinvested in projects which offer
an expected return exactly equal to  the cost of equity capital.
                          9 _
                            10

-------
In this case, the general-valuation model, Equation (2-6),



reduces to



                 E
          P   =  —
          *0      R
Therefore
                El
          R  =  p1                                      (2-10)

                F0



The cost of equity capital is equal to the expected earnings



per share during the next year (E, ) divided by the current



share price (Pn) •   (See Appendix A for the development of



Equation (2-9) .  )



     The expression "no real growth" needs further explanation.



Real growth refers to reinvestment at rates of return different



from the cost of capital.  If the firm reinvests future earnings



in projects yielding exactly the cost of capital, nothing will



change.  The investors will simply have given up current



dividends at the time of the reinvestment for a future stream



which has exactly .the same present value.  Thus, the adoption



of these projects  will make the firm no more or less attractive



to investors.   The firm's stock price will not change, nor will



its earnings per share (E-,).  Therefore, the earnings -price



ratio will still equal the cost of equity capital.



     If the project offers a future rate of return in excess



of the cost of equity capital, the stock price will rise, current



current earnings per share will remain constant, and the



earnings-price ratio will understate the cost of equity capital.





                           2-11

-------
     For example,  consider a firm initially earning and paying



out $10 per share  per year.   This dividend is not expected to



grow or decline over time.  R, the cost of equity capital, is



10%, so stock price is $100.  Now the fj.rjn announces that H



will invest the first year's earnings in a project expected



to yield x dollars per year  in perpetuity, starting in t = I.



The expected rate  of return  on this project is x/10.



     Table (2-1) shows, for different levels of x, the errors  in



using the earnings-price ratio as a measure of R.  Note that



the measure is correct only  in the case in which the additional




investment offers  a 10% return.
                      Table 2-1



   THE RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN THE EARNINGS PRICE RATIO AND




              REINVESTMENT RATES OF RETURN
X
(Dollar
Return
Per Year)

$ .50
$1.00
$1.50
$2. 00
x/10
(Expected
Yield on
Proj ect)

0.05
0.10
0.15
0. 20
po
(100 + Net
Present Worth
of Project)
I '
95.45
100.
104.55
109.09
EPSI/PQ
(Earnings-
Price
Ratio)

p. 105
0,100
0.096
0.92
R
(Cost of
Equity
Capital)

0.10
0.10
0.10
0. 10
      Source:   S.  C.  Myers  [18],  Table 1, p.  14.




     The usual view is that earnings^price ratios tend to



understate the cost of equity capital.  This is based on the



assumption that corporate managers will accept only those



projects with expected returns greater than or equal to R.




                            2-12

-------
To the extent that real growth opportunities exist, then,



the earning-price ratio will understate the cost of equity



capital.  In this case, the estimates of R from Equation (2-10')



can be considered as minimum values for the cost of equity



capital.








Finite-Horizon-Growth Model



     The third valuation model makes assumptions about



investment behavior which are between the extremes of



the previous two.  Suppose the firm can reinvest earnings



at expected rates or return greater than the cost of equity



capital, but only for a finite number of years, T.  Beyond T



all real growth opportunities cease; any further reinvestment



earns only the cost of capital.  Thus, the firm will have T



years of rapid growth, followed by an indefinite period of



normal  growth.  Given these assumptions, the share price is



given by
II
 R
                                       Rl
                                           T
(2  11)
where
            the investment per share in period 1  (i.e.,



            retained earnings)



            the rate of return on reinvested earnings  for



            years 1 through T




            (r =£  R)
                            2-13

-------
Therefore ,






          R  =      +   i  [r   R]T                      (2-12)
     As seen from Equation (2-12), the absence of real  growth




opportunities (i.e.,  r =  R) ,  R is  simply the earnings-price



ratio.   It can also be shown  that  when the  real growth




opportunities are expected to last indefinitely,  R is again



given by 3-,/Pn + g-   (See Appendix A for the development



of Equation (2-11.) . )



     Because of the more  flexible  and realistic assumptions



of this model, there  is no a  priori reason to expect that



estimates of R will be either upward or downward biased.
                          2-14

-------
       IV.   THE WEIGHTED AVERAGE COST OF CAPITAL3
(a)   The  Effects  of Leverage on the Market Value of the Firm




     Modigliani and Miller  (MM)  [15] were the first to



rigorously consider the question of how the value of a firm



changes with financial leverage.  Their main conclusion is



that in perfect capital markets  and no taxes, the value of



the  firm will be independent of  the proportion  of debt and



equity in the firm's capital structure.



     The adjective "perfect" is  used to describe markets  in



which no trader is large enough  to have any control over



market prices, and in which distorting elements such as



transaction costs  and taxes can  safely be ignored.









The  Modigliani and Miller Argument



     Suppose that we observe a  group of firms which are



identical except for financing.  We observe the relative  value



of firms which are all-equity  financed  (class A)  and of the



others (class B) which have $4.00  of debt outstanding.  The



MM proposition implies that






          V.  =  DR  +  EB                               (2-13)
           110.00  =  $4.00  +   $6.00
                           2-15

-------
where



     V.  =  the market value of firm A



     DB  =  the market value of the debt of firm B



     £„  =  the market value of the equity of firm B
      JD




There are markets for unleveraged firms, for the equity of



leveraged firms, and for debt.



     To "prove" the proposition we consider what happens if



the prices are not in the predicted relationship.  What if
                                                         (2-14
          $10.00  >  $4.00  +  $£.QQ?





In this case,  who would ever buy shares in the unleveraged



firm?  Since we assume that all firms under consideration are



exactly the same except for financing, an investor who buys



up the outstanding debt and equity of a leveraged firm (for



$9.00) obtains exactly the same commodity as one who buys up



all the shares on an unleveraged firm (for $10.00).



     On the other hand, what if





          VA  <  D   +  E                                (2-15)
          $10.00   <  $4.00   +  $7.00?
                          2-16

-------
Consider the options open to investors who wish to hold the



equity of leveraged firms.  Direct purchase costs $7.00,but



they also have the option of buying unleveraged firms for



$10.00, selling $4.00 of debt, and thereby obtaining a



residual claim for a net cost of $6.00.  The residual claim



is exactly equivalent to the leveraged equity of class B firms.



In this case we would expect the value of unleveraged firms to



rise and the value of leveraged firms to fall until the MM



proposition is satisfied.



     In this case, at least, we see that market processes tend



to the result that the market value of firms is independent



of the proportions of debt and equity financing used.  Since



advantageous trading opportunities are created at every point



where  the MM proposition is violated, and since equilibrium



in capital markets may be defined as the absence of favorable



trading opportunities, the MM proposition is a necessary condi-



tion for equilibrium in security markets.   (That  is,  at  equilib



rium all securities of equivalent risk must have  the  same



expected rates of  return, thus eliminating the possibility of



making "easy money" through combinations of trades.)









Effects on Equilibrium Expected Rates  of Return  on  the



Firm's Stock



     Increased financial  leverage increases the  expected  rate



of return on the firm's stock, but it  also  increases  the  risk
                           2-17

-------
borne by stockholders.  Table  (2-2) presents  an  example  illustr. ting



this.  The firm is expected to generate  $10.00 per  year



operating income, but with $7.00 per year  standard  deviation.



Assume that MM are right, and that the firm can  borrow at  8



percent.  Then the expected rate of return to equity  goes  up.



But  so does the risk:  as debt increases,  the risk  of the



operating earnings is concentrated on a  smaller  and smaller



equity base.








Modigliani and Miller Propositions I and II



     The results of these arguments are  the famous  MM proposi



tions:



     Proposition I.   The value of the firm is independent  of



the  proportion of debt and equity in the firm's  capital



structure.   It will  always be equal to its value under all



equity financing (Vn).






          V  =  D  +  E  =  VQ                           (2-16)






     Proposition II.   The cost of equity capital increases as



a function of the leverage ratio, (D/E).   The relationship  .s



given by




          k  =  P0  +  (P0- *) '  (§)                       C2-17)



where




     k  =  the cost  of equity capital




     PQ  =  the cost  of equity capital  with all-equity



           financing  (i.e.,  D = 0)



     i   =  the interest  rate on debt
                          2-li

-------
                  Table  2-2
         FINANCIAL LEVERAGE—EXAMPLE;


The firm has assets of $100 which are expected to
produce $10 annually in perpetuity before interest.
Assume no taxes.  The interest rate is 8 percent.


Total return
Return to debt
Return to equity
Equity investment
Rate of return relative
to original equity
investment
Standard deviation of
equity earnings
Standard deviation of
return to equity
relative to original
investment
I Debt
0 25
Financing
50
75

10 10
0 2
10 8
100 75

.10 .107
7 7


.07 .093
10
4
6
50

. 12
7


. 14
10
6
4
25

.16
7


. 28
Source:  S. C. Myers [23], Table 2, p. 9.
                      2-19

-------
The reader should note that these proportions are true only if


MM's assumptions (perfect capital markets and no taxes) are


true.  Also assumed is that bankruptcy is costless, that is


the firm can be reorganized at no cost to the stockholders.




Corporate Income Taxes and Bankruptcy Costs


     Thus far we have ignored a number of things.  The most


important is the corporate income tax.  Since interest payments


are deducted from taxable income, increases in leverage reduce


taxes and increase  the aggregate amount the firm can pay out


to investors.   Thus,  one would expect to increase both the


overall value of the  firm and the market price of its stock.


More precisely, borrowing should increase the market value of


the firm by the present value of tax savings due to borrowing.


     Tax savings can  be extremely valuable.   Suppose a firm


issues  $10.0 million  of 6-percent perpetual debt, and that the


corporate income tax  rate is  T    0.5.  Then the present value

              4
of taxes saved   is $5.0 million, or one-half the principal


amount  of the  debt  issued.   The computations are as follows.


     The tax "rebate" due to  deducting $600,000 from taxable in-


come is $300,000.   The present value of $300,000 in perpetuity is


           oo
           Y    500,000       300,000     tc  nnn  ._.
                (1.06)  t   =     0.06    =   $5,000,000       (2-18)
                          2-20

-------
Six percent is the appropriate discount rate because the risk

characteristics of the tax rebates are essentially the same as

those of the interest payments on the firm's debt."    If

investors discount the latter at six percent, the same rate

should be applied to the former.

     Since the present value of tax savings on perpetual debt

is simply the tax rate times the amount of debt issues,  the

MM Proposition I for perpetuities must be modified to:


          V=D+E=VQ+  TCD                  (2-19)


where

     T   =  the corporate income tax rate

     VQ  =  what the firm would be worth if it were

            unleveraged


In general, the proposition is:

                                   present value of tax
          V=D+E=V^+  savings due to current
                                   and future debt

                                                        (2-20)

     Example.   At the end of 1972, the XYZ Company's book

equity was $565 million.  There was no long-term debt.  How

would the value of the firm change if it issued debt to retire

$170 million of stock?  (This would give a 30-percent debt

ratio, which is not excessive for an established firm.)  Accord

ing to MM, the firm's value would increase by $85 million  (AV).
                           2-21

-------
          AV  =  AVQ  +  TCAD





              =  0  +  0.5 (170,000,000)






              =  85,000,000





In other words, the tax subsidy to debt financing is a strong



incentive indeed.   Taken literally, Equation  (2-19) implies  that



the optimal capital structure is 99.99 percent debt.



     Of course, this is a lopsided result.  It indicates that



shareholders always benefit from increased leverage, which is



nonsense.  A more sensible conclusion follows when we intro-



duce another consideration.  This is the apparent existence



of "costs of financial distress."








Costs of Financial Distress



     At no point has the possibility of financial distress



been ignored.   We have not assumed that the payment which



the holders of the firm's bond,5 receive will always be the



amount promised in the bond contract.   What has been assumed



is that financial distress is costless, in the special sense



that its occurrence in any contingency does not affect the



amount which the firm pays out to investors.




     However,  if the financial distress will reduce the aggre-



gate amount which current investors will receive, then the



current value  of the firm's securities will be reduced.  The



amount of the  reduction will depend on the probability of



"trouble".
                          2-22

-------
     The costs associated with financial distress are difficult




to pin down precisely, but they can he roughly grouped into




three categories.1




     1.    Suppose the firm is threatened with the imminent




          possibility that available cash flow will be less




          than its promised interest and/or principal payments.




          One way to avoid bankruptcy is to change the firm's




          investment strategy; that is, the firm can pay more




          to its creditors by investing less.  But if valuable




          investments are thus foregone, then the changes will




          be costly from the point of view of present investors,




          even though the cost may be justified if bankruptcy




          is thereby avoided.




     2.    Another evasive tactic is to obtain additional




          financing.  In fact, if the firm could always obtain




          additional financing or revise its capital structure




          when threatened by financial distress , then there




          would be no reason for distress actually to occur,




          and firms could operate at very high debt ratios.




          However,  distress often arrives without many early




          warning signals, and once the firm is in distress,




          negotiations between stockholders and creditors  are




          vastly complicated.  Both parties find themselves




          holding high-risk securities, and neither has much




          incentive to bail the other out.




     3.    If the firm has enough debt, there will be some




          contingencies in which bankruptcy cannot be avoided.




                           2-23

-------
          Aside  from the direct costs>  confusion  and  delay



          associated with the legal process of  reorganization,



          the  firm may be forced to forego investment  oppor-



          tunities which would be feasible and  profitable if



          the  firm had avoided bankrupcy by borrowing  less.



          These  costs will likewise reduce the  present value



          of the firm.








Practical Implications of the Modigliani-Miller Argument



     If the MM argument is accepted in principle, but  taxes



and costs of distress are taken into account, the market value



of the firm will depend on leverage in t\\e way  shown by the



solid line in Figure 2-1.  The optimum is reached when the



present value of tax savings due to additional  borrowing is



just offset by increases in the present value of costs of



distress due to  additional borrowing.   Of course, this assumes



that the firm can actua-lly find takers for the  relatively



high-risk debt that would have to be issued to  reach the



optimum.  If this is not feasible,  the MM recommendation



becomes "borrow  as much as you can."  Unfortunately, there is



no satisfactory procedure for predicting the debt level at rhich




the optimum would be reached for a given firm.







(b)  The Weighted Average Cost of Capital



     In the case of all-equity financing, the problem of



capital budgeting is reduced to the task of identifying



projects with net present values (NPV) greater  than zero.



The NPV is an estimate  of the project's market value (net of






                           2-24

-------
Firm Value
V = D + E

 A
                                      Cost of
                                  Financial Distress
                         Present Value
                         of Tax Shield
                                                            D/V
                                                          Financial
                                                          Leverage
           All Equity
           Financing
                      Theoretical
                       Opt imum
    Figure  2-1.
Impact of
(Source:
leverage on
S.  C.  Myers

    2-25
the value of
[23],  Figure
the firm.
2, p.  18,

-------
investment required) if offered to the market as a separately



financed enterprise.



     When a project is partially financed with debt, the NPV



assuring all-equity financing must be adjusted to allow for



the positive or negative effects associated with debt



financing.   The basis for this adjustment is the previously



discussed MM valuation formula for the firm (see Equation  (2-20  )



Assuming a modest amount of debt financing  (i.e., the debt



ratio lies  to the left of the theoretical optimum in Figure 2  1  ,



the value of the firm is equal to the all-equity value plus



the present value of the tax savings on current and future



debt.



     The adjusted present value for a project can similarly



be computed from the all-equity NPV plus the present value



of the tax  savings on debt supported by the project.   That is,





          APV  =  NPV(p0)   +  PVTS                      (2-21)



where



     APV  =  the adjusted present value



 NPV(pg)  =  the net present value assuming the project



             is all-equity financed




    PVTS  =  present value of tax savings on debt



             supported by the project





The new decision rule is






         Accept Project if APV  > 0                    (2-22)







                          2-26

-------
     For a project to be acceptable under the base case

assumptions of all-equity financing, its internal rate of

return (IRR) had to exceed R, the cost of equity capital.

It is clear, however, from a comparison of Equations (2-5) and

(2-22)   that as long as PVTS is greater than zero, the mini

mum acceptable IRR will now be less than R.

     Example.   Consider a project which requires an invest-

ment of $1000 and produces an expected perpetual return of

$90 per year.   The cost of capital for all-equity financing

is 10 percent (pn).

     The base case net present value for the project is given

by
      NPV(pn)  =   I     9° f     1000
           U      t=l   (1-1)
                    100


Thus, assuming all-equity financing, this project should be

rejected.  The internal rate of return is 9 percent, while

the hurdle rate is 10 percent.

     Now assume that the project will support $400 of perpetual

debt.  The interest rate on the debt is 7 percent.  The present

value of the tax savings is given by
          PVTS  =   I     (.Q7)(4QO)(.5)
                   t=l       (1.07)*
                =  200
                           2-27

-------
The adjusted present value for the project is $100.  Hence it

should now be accepted.  In the debt financing case, note that

the minimum acceptable rate of return on the project is only

8 percent, at which point the APV is exactly equal to zero.

This minimum acceptable level of project profitability is

called the weighted average cost of capital.   It is designated

at p*.



Formal Definition of the Weighted Average Cost of Capital, p*

     The weighted average cost of capital,  p*, is the minimum

acceptable rate of return for a project so  that acceptance of

the project does not reduce the value of the  firm's common

stock.

     The net present value of a project that  is partially

financed by debt is given by


                       T      C,
          NPV(p*)  =   I   	L_^     I                 (2-23)
                      t=l  (l+p*)r      U

where

          Ct  =  the expected project cash  flow in year t

          Ig  =  the initial investment (assumed to be

                 made at t = 0)

          T   =  the estimated lifetime of  the project

          p*  =  the weighted average cost  of capital



The weighted average cost of capital p* must  reflect the

financing proportions of the project, the riskiness of the


                          2-28

-------
investment and, the relationship between these factors and

the economic lifetime of the project.

     Now comparison of Equations (2-21) and (2-23) makes it

perfectly clear that the adjusted present value and the net

present value computed using p* (NPV(p*)) are measuring

exactly the same thing.  A project is  acceptable if the APV

is greater than zero, or correspondingly, if the NPV(p*) > 0.

     Thus, we can use this relationship between the APV and

the NPV(p*) to define p*.

     The weighted average cost of capital p* for a given

project is the value such that



          NPV(P*)  =  APV                                (2-24)

or
           T     C.         T     C.
           I	T-  =   I	f  +  PVTS         (2 24a)
          t=0  (1+P*)      t=0  (1+Pn)
(Note that in the above equations the investment term, !„,

has been included as the t = 0 term of the summations.)

     The minimum acceptable rate of return on a project is

obtained by solving Equation (2-24) when the APV is equal

to zero.

     Example.   Consider a project which requires a $1,000

investment and is expected to last for one year only.  Assume

Pn = 0.20.   In the base case,


                          2-29

-------
           NI'Vl  (])  =  —j      1,000

where
           C,   =   the  expected  year-end  cash  flow


Now, assume the project will add $400 to the firm's debt
capacity for one year, and that the borrowing rate is 8 percent
Then the project's total contribution to the firm's value  (see
Equation (2-21)) is

          APV  =          1000  +  •5(-°8
                  cl
                  — -     1000  +  14.8
                  1. 2

Setting APV equal to  zero and solving for C, yields the minimum
acceptable C,  equal to 1182.2.   Therefore, the minimum acceptab  e
rate of return on the project,  p*, is equal to 0.182  (18.2
percent) .

Rules of Thumb for Computing the Weighted Average Cost
of Capital
     Now we need 'a simple formula for computing p* as a function
of R and other factors.   Unfortunately, there is no general
purpose fOKjnula.  There are some reasonable rules of  thumb
however,
                          2-30

-------
     i.    The MM Formula






               0*  =  Pn(.l   T L)                        (---M
                       (.i      C  '


where



     e i  =  the basic hurdle rate  for  the  firm under



            all-equity financing




      L  =  the f i rm's target debt ratio



     T   =  the corporate  tax rate.
      c            r




 This formula applies only  to projects having the  same  business



 risk as the firm's  existing assets  and do not lead to  a  shift



 in  the firm's target debt  ratio.








      ii.  Generalized MM  Formula




                P *   =  p , . (1   T _ L . )                      (1 - 2 6 ')




 where



      .: v  =  the hurdle rate for  project  j  under  all-equity



              financing



      L.   =  the debt capacity  ratio  for  proj ect  j  (i.e. ,  the



              proportion of project  j  that can be  debt  financed



              without reducing the firm's  other  debt  capacity).








      iii.  The Textbook Formula
                   1(1   Tc> r  +  R  v
                            2-31

-------
where
     i  =  the current interest rate on the firm's bonds
     R  =  the cost of equity capital
     D  =  market value of debt
     E  =  market value of equity
     V  =  D + E

     Example.   Consider a firm,  which is  initially all-equi;y
financed,  that is expected to earn $100,000 per year in
perpetuity.   If PQ = 0.10 then
          VQ  =            =  1,000,000
Now it changes its capital  structure to include $500, 000 od
debt at 7 percent.   (The  proceeds  are used to repurchase
$500,000 of equity.)   Following MM we assume the value of
the firm, V,  increases by the  present value of the tax savings
generated by  the debt
          V  =  VQ   +  PVTS
                1,000,000   +   17>50°
                1,250,000
                          2-32

-------
The firm now has a  (market value) debt  ratio  of


          D  =   500,000       „  .n
          V      1 ,250,000


The market value of  the equity is 1,250,000    500  =  750,000.

The expected rate  of return  on equity  is


                 100,000    .07(500,000)  +  0.35(500,000)
                              750,000


             =   0. 11




We now have the data  to compute p* from the textbook formula.


          p*  =  i(l   T } ^   +  R |                     (2-27)



              =  .07(.S) (.4)  +  .lie.6)



              =  .08


This is the appropriate hurdle rate for a project which offers

constant expected cash flows for the indefinite future and

which does not change the risk characteristics of  the  firm's

assets or debt ratio  of the firm.

     We could also have used the MM formula to compute p*.
                          2-33

-------
                 P0(l   TcL)                             (2-25)
                 .101
                 .08
Practical Usefulness of the Three Cost-of-Capital Formulas



     The various rules for computing the weighted average cost



of capital clearly depend on special assumptions.  The complete




list is given in Table 2-3.  The table seems to indicate that



the generalized MM rule is superior to the other two, but even



its realism must be questioned.



     However,, we are not really concerned with whether the



rules are exactly true, but whether they are useful rules




of thumb in a practical context.  It has been shown by



Myers [21] that the generalized MM rule is reasonably accurate



if capital markets are perfect and the rule is properly used.



It is beyond the scope of this survey to deal with the question



of robustness of the formulas under various violation of the



assumptions.  This question has been examined in detail by



Myers [21] and the interested reader is referred to this



source.




     In Part 5 the APV formula and its application to invest-



ment problems will be further examined.
                           2-34

-------
                        Table 2-3


         NECESSARY AND SUFFICIENT CONDITIONS FOR

                COST-OF-CAPITAL FORMULAS
Equation
   Condition
                                         Formula
                                MM
                              Generalized
                                  MM
                    Textbook
          Dividend policy
          irrelevant

  (lla)   Leverage irrelevant
          except for corporate
          income taxes

  (lib)   Investment projects
          are perpetuities

  (lie)   Project does not
          change firm's risk
          characteristics

  (lid)   Project makes a
          permanent contri
          bution to debt
          capacity
  (lie)




  (llf)

  (15a)
Acceptance of project
does not lead to
shift of target debt
ratio

Risk-independence

Firm's assets
expected to generate
a constant and
perpetual earnings
s t r e am
  (15b)    Firm is already at
          target debt ratio
                       x
n. a.
                      n. a.
    *  n.a.  = not applicable.

    Source:   S.  C. Myers, [21], Table 1, p. 14
                           2-35

-------
fc)  Relationship Between .P^J
     When the all-equity-financed firm revises its capital
structure to include debt,  the  cost of equity capital (R)
will rise because financial leverage makes the firm's common
stock even riskier than before.
     Figure 2-2 shows how R,  i,  and p* vary as a function of
financial leverage.   Because  of  the tax shield provided by
the debt in the capital structure,  the weighted average cost
of capital will decline with  increasing leverage.   However,
beyond some point (B in Figure  2-2), the possibility of
bankruptcy will begin to have increasingly negative conse-
quences.  As leverage is further increased, a point will be
reached (C in Figure 2-2) beyond which the tax benefits of
additional debt are  more than offset by the increasing risl-
of bankruptcy.   At this point p* will cease to decline and
start to rise.

Generalization of the p* Textbook Formula to Include Other
Types of Financing
     The formula assumes there  are only two kinds of financing
instruments.  But the weighting  principal remains the same
even if there are others.  Consider the more general case
where the firm is financed with  debt, preferred and common
stock, and financial leases.   Since financial leases are
simply an alternative form of debt, the first step in computing
                          2-36

-------
     Required Rate
       of Return
    (Cost of Capital]
                                                    Cost of
                                                     Equity
                                                       (R)
                                                 Weighted Average
                                                 Cost of Capital
                                                      Cost of
                                                        Debt
                                                         Financial
                                                         Leverage
                                                          (D/V)
All-Equity
Financing
Probability
of Bankruptcy
Negligible
Probability
of Bankruptcy
Not Negligible
      Figure  2- 2.
    Effects  of  financial  leverage  on  costs
    of  debt  and  equity  financing and  the
    weighted average  cost  of  capital.
                              2-37

-------
p*is to determine the capitalized value of financial leases.


This is done by capitalizing the expected lease payments at


the corporate debt rate i.


     The overall cost of capital is given by



          P* =  i(l - T) £ + i(l   T)£ + kp •  £ + R '  |


                                                        (2- 28)
where


     L   =  the capitalized value of financial leases


     P   =  the market value of outstanding preferred  stool-


     kp  =  the yield on the preferred stock (i.e., the cost


            of capital for preferred stock)


     V   =  D + L + P + E


All other symbols are as defined for Equation (2-27)


     Example.   Consider the case of the Winco Distribution


Company.  Winco has $5.3 million in long-term debt outstanding,


$5.0 million of preferred stock, and $27.1 million of  commo i


stock (all figures are market values).   Its current cost of


borrowing is 5-1.4%,  its preferred stock cost is 6%, and its


current cost of equity capital is 10.6%.  In addition, Winco


has financial leases  with annual payments of $850,000  per year


(assumed to continue  indefinitely).  The capitalized value  of


the lease payments (at 5-1/4%) is $16.2 million.  The  weighted


average cost of capital using Equation  (2-28)  is 7%.  The


details of the calculation are given in Table 2-4.
                          2-38

-------
                       Table 2-4

              CALCULATION OF THE WEIGHTED

           AVERAGE COST OF CAPITAL: EXAMPLE
Source

Long-terra debt
Leases
Preferred Stock
Equity

Total
Amount
($ Millions)

5.3
16.2
5. 0
27.1

53.6
Pro-
portion

0.099
0.302
0.093
0. 506

1.000
After-
Tax
Cost

2.625
2.625
6.000
10.600


Weighted
Cost

0. 26
0. 79
0.56
5.3&

6.97
     Of the variables used to compute the weighted average

cost of capital, only R, the cost of equity capital, is not

directly observable.  (R was computed using Equation (2-8)
     D-,
with
      0
. 6%  and g  =
The Effect of Debt Financing on the Estimation Equations for R

     The estimation equations developed for R in Section II

assumed the firm was all-equity financed.  How will the form

of these equations change when other types of financing are

used as well?

     The answer is, not at all, providing the proper assumptions

are made.   In Section II the use of a single value of R for
                                                 o
all future periods assumed that the business risk  of the  firm
                          2-39

-------
will remain stable over time, or else differing R's would

                                               g
be required to reflect changing business risks.   When debt


(or other) financing is introduced, the same type of consicer-


ation is involved.  The use of debt increases the equity rsk


(and thus increases R), but the same value of R for all ful ure


periods is appropriate as long as the financial risk of th«


firm is assumed to remain stable over time.   Under these


assumptions,  the same discounted cash flow models developed


in Section II can be used to estimate R for a firm which is


only partially equity financed.    Further,  the estimating


equations are not affected by the issue of new equity since


we deal with  per-share values.   The necessary assumption is


that new equity is issued at P , the per-share price of old


equity.
                          2-40

-------
                 PART 2 — APPENDIX A






       DEVELOPMENT OF SECURITY VALUATION MODELS
     The basic valuation is given by



                 oo      D




           °    t = l  (1 + R)1"








Model 1—Perpetual Growth




     Suppose that in each period the firm invests a fraction




b of its earnings in new projects (note that b < 1 else the




firm would never pay dividends).  These projects produce a




perpetual yield on equity of r, beginning with the next period




By definition, the earnings and dividends in period t are




given by




          Et  =  Et_x + rbEt_x








              =  Et_1(l + br)
              =  E0(l + g)t                              (2A-1)




where g is the growth rate of dividends per share  (g = br)





          Dt  =  DQ(1 + g)1                              (2A-2)




Substituting Equation (2A-2) into Equation  (2-6).
                          2-41

-------
                 t=l   (1 +




                  D
                   i
                   L-  (g < R)                           C2A-3J
                    g



Note the condition that the growth rate must be less than the



discount rate.  If the product of the reinvestment rate r



times the retention rate b  equals  R, PQ will be infinite.







Model 2—-No "Real Growth"



     Suppose now that all equity reinvestment produces an



expected return equal to the cost of capital R.  Then the



growth rate of per-share earnings and dividends will equal



bR.  (Note that g by definition will now be less than R, since



b < 1.)  Substituting g   bR into Equation (2A-3)



                    D,
          P
           0     R(l   b)
              =  if                                     C2A-4)




Note that this equation also applies when b = 0, i.e., the



firm pays out all of its earnings and does not grow.







Model 5 — Finite Growth



     Consider now a more realistic variant of the perpetual-



growth model.  The special investment opportunities (r > R)



are not available in perpetuity but only for some finite



interval of T years.
                         2-42

-------
     The share value at t = 0 is equal to the no- real- growth

value, plus the present value of the T years of real growth

opportunities (PVGO) .


                 El
          P0  =  if  +  PVGO                            (2A-5)

In year t the firm invests I  dollars per share  (withheld

earnings) which generates a perpetual return r.  The value

in period t of this investment  (PVGO ) is given by

                    oo    I   • r
          PVGO   =  I   — * - -     I
              1    t=l   (1 + R)r      r

                    '   ' r
                    - R -


                    I  (r   R)
                                                        (2A-6)
The value at t =  0 of these T growth opportunities  is  given

by

                   T   I.(r - R)
          PVGO  =  I   — - -                        (2A-7)
                  t=l  R(l + R)

Now

          It  =   1^1 + g)1'1

Therefore ,


          PVGO  =  1^  - I,   I    (1  +  g^'1
                     K      i   t=l    (1 +  R)1


                -        R       I    (1 +  gj1'1
                       --
                                 tl   u  +  R)t-i


                             .1   . Y   Cl +  g)T        f2A_8
                                                        (
                           2-43

-------
 It now remains to sum the terms  in  i   The sum of  the  geo


metric series with T   1 terms (ST_1) is given by
                   1
                        1 + R
           'T-l
                           .
                        1 + R
                    1 + R
                             1
                 1 +

                 1 + R
                              C2A-9)
                    R   G
                    „     __j


If, as we generally would expect, (1 + g)/(l + R) is close



to one, and T is not too large, then the right-hand term  in



Equation (2A-9)  admits to a convenient approximation



                T
          1 +

          1 + R
  =:  1
TCg
(2A-10)
Substituting the expression for the sum (2A-9) and this  approxi


mation (2A-10)  into Equation (2A-8) and simplifying, we  obtain
          PVGO  =
                       R
                     R
         VT
                              (2A-11)
We can now state the final form of Equation  (2A-5)
-
 R
                            R
                          R
     VT
                                                        (2A-12)
                          2-44

-------
                   FOOTNOTES FOR PART 2







1.     This definition of the cost of capital is based on a



      definition by S.  C.  Myers in [19], pp. 63-65.








2.     Precisely speaking,  Equation (2-1) assumes that dividends



      are paid at the end of period T + 1.   If dividends were



      paid and invested during the period,  Equation (2 1) would



      have to be adjusted to allow for the  additional return



      received.  (See Part 3, Section III,  item 2 for a detailed



      discussion of investment returns.)  Whether the dividends



      are reinvested or consumed at the end of period T + 1 makes



      no difference in the return calculation.  The effect will



      show up in the investment base for the next period (i.e.,




      the stockholder will either have Pt + 1 or Pf+i  + Dt+l



      to invest in period t + 2).








3.     Large portions of Section IV, including footnotes  4-6,



      have been reproduced verbatim from two unpublished manu-



      scripts by Stewart C. Myers.  These are, "Optimal  Capital



      Structure" [23] and "Interaction of Investment and Financing



      Decisions" [24].   Both copyright 1975 by S. C. Myers.  The



      excerpts from these manuscripts are included with  the kind



      permission of the author.








4.     The firm's taxable income is assumed to always exceed



      the interest payments.  If this is not the case,  the
                           2-45

-------
     exact present value of the tax savings becomes extremely



     elusive.   One reason is the fact that accounting losses



     can be carried forward for tax purposes.








5.    Actually,  there are some problems  with this  assumption.



     What if the firm will  issue more debt if  earnings rise



     more than  expected, and will retire  debt  if  earnings  are



     disappointing?  Then the tax benefits are uncertain:



     they take  on the risk  characteristics of  the firm's



     assets.  However, it is difficult  to specify precisely



     what the discount rate should be under these circumstances.



     Whatever the discount  rate, the favorable tax treatment



     of debt provides a strong incentive  for the  use  of debt



     financing.








6.    These costs are discussed more fully in Robichek and



     Myers, "Problems in the Theory of  Optimal Capital structure,



     Journal of Finance and Quantitative  Analysis,  June 1966,



     pp.  15-19.   The existence of bankruptcy costs has been



     documented by Nevins D.  Baxter:  "Leverage, Risk  of Ruin



     and the Cost of Capital,"  Journal of Finance, September



     1967, p. 96.








7.    This condition is actually more restrictive  than



     necessary.   What is really required  is a  rule for def ning
                        2-46

-------
     P* such that NPV(p*) > 0 whenever APV x 0.  Howcvei ,  this



     generalized requirement does not provide a practical



     procedure for estimating p*, as does Equation (2-24).








8.   The business risk of the firm refers to the riskiness



     of the firm's assets independently of how they are



     financed.  For example, one can speak of the  (business)



     risk of being in the electric utility or machine tool



     business.  Financial risk refers to the additional risks



     borne by the stockholders when debt (or other funds of



     senior financing) is used by the firm.  Since the  stock-



     holders have a residual claim to the firm's earnings (and



     assets), the use of debt will tend to magnify the



     business risk of the firm as it is passed along to the



     stockholders.  This magnification is referred to as



     financial risk.  An example of this effect is shown in




     Table 2-2.








9.   To be precise,  the use of a constant discount rate R



     assumes that the risk of the firm's dividend stream



     increases at a  constant rate as a function of time.



     That is,  risk increases at a constant rate as one  looks




     further and further into the future.  This is not  an



     unreasonable assumption, and is almost universally
                          2-47

-------
      assumed in studies  using  discounted cash flow valuation



      models.   For a fuller  discussion of this matter,  sec



      Robichek and Myers,  "Conceptual  Problems in the use of



      Rick-Adjusted Discount Rates," The  Journal  of Finance,



      Vol.  XXI (Dec.  1966),  pp.  727-730.








10.    This  is  precisely true only  in the  absence  of equity



      issue costs.   From  the point  of  view  of  the  existing



      stockholders,  the required rate  of  return on  new  issues



      must  be  slightly higher than  R to offset  the  effect of



      transactions  costs.  This will allow  the  new  stockholders



      to  earn  the  rate R  on  the gross  proceeds  of  the issue



      (i.e.,  their  investment).
                           2-48

-------
        ESTIMATION OF THE COST OE CAPITAL




       FOR MAJOR UNITED STATES INDUSTRIES




WITH APPLICATION TO POLLUTION-CONTROL INVESTMENTS
   PART 3.   THEORY: RISK AND RETURN CONCEPTS
                Dr. Gerald A. Pogue



                  4 Summit Drive



             Manhasset, New York 11030
                  November 1975

-------
                   I.   INTRODUCTION
     As discussed in Part 2, the cost of equity capital is



the rate of return (dividends plus capital gains)  investors



expect to earn by holding a firm's common stock.   Assuming



that investors are by-and-large averse to bearing risk, the



required rate of return will depend on the stock's risk level:



The higher the risk, the higher the expected rate of return



(cost of capital).



     But this definition of the cost of capital raises as



many questions as it answers.  How is risk to be defined and



measured?  What are the current theories about the relationship



between risk and required returns?  How are stock market (i.e.,



financial) risk measures related to the characteristics of



firms'  (real) assets, such as the variability of corporate



earnings, the degree of financial leverage, and the growth



rate of earnings?



     These questions are the subject of Part 3.  Part  3 is



organized in four sections.  Sections II and III provide a



nontechnical introduction to the current risk and return



theories.  Section IV summarizes the existing empirical studies



relating to the real determinants of a stock's financial risk.



     Sections II and III perform overlapping functions.



Section II provides a brief introduction to the "high  points"
                          3-1

-------
of the theory.   Section III presents a detailed survey for



the reader intent on a greater depth of understanding.  It



contains a two-part article written by Professors Franco



Modigliani and  Gerald Pogue entitled, "An Introduction to



Risk and Return:  Concepts and Evidence," [16].   Readers



familiar with the basic notions of portfolio and capital



markets theories  could well skip Sections II and III.
                          3-2

-------
      II.   A BRIEF INTRODUCTION TO THE THEORY OF


         RISK AND THE REQUIRED RATE OF RETURN1
(a)   The Risk of Individual Common Stocks


     The measurement of common stock risk is a complex subject.


No-one has "all the answers".   Yet enough is known and


reasonably well agreed upon to identify the main elements of


stock risk and to measure them using past data.   The purpose


of this section is to explain this methodology.





The Risk of Holding a Portfolio of Securities


     Some investors hold stock in only one company, others


in hundreds of companies.  But in any case, they are interested


in the rate of return realized on their portfolios, not the


rate of return on any individual security per se.


     Let R  stand for the rate of return realized on an
          P

investor's portfolio over a given period of time.  R  is


equal to dividends plus capital gains, divided by the value


of the portfolio at the start of the period:
                 D  +
          R   _  _P
          R   -  -^y

           F        P
                          3-3

-------
where

     n    =  dividends received from the portfolio
      P

     V    =  market value of the portfolio at the start
      P

             of the period


     AV   =  capital gain on the portfolio during the period


     The investor is obviously concerned with the predicta-


bility of R —i.e., with the possible difference between the


anticipated and the actual rate of return.  The usual


statistical measure of the extent of possible deviation is


a  , the standard deviation of R .
 P                             P
Diversification


     Intelligent diversification can substantially reduce


the risk of a portfolio return.   But the risk cannot be


eliminated entirely.


     Wagner and Lau [28]  have reported an experiment which


clearly illustrates this.   They formed portfolios of varying


size by randomly selecting stocks from a sample of firms


rated A+ in Standard and Poor's 1960 Earnings and Dividend


Rankings.   Then they determined what the month-by-month


portfolio returns would have been during the 1960-70 period,


and calculated the standard deviation of this monthly


return.   The results are shown in Table 3-1.


     The reduction in risk due to diversification is dramatic


However, it is also evident that additional diversification
                          3-4

-------
                       Table  3  1

             RISK VERSUS  DIVERSIFICATION:

             RANDOMLY SELECTED  PORTFOLIOS*
Number of
Securities in
Portfolio

1
o
^
5
4
5
10
15
20
Standard Deviation
n~F Rp1"ii~m
Percent/Month

7.0
5. 0
4. 8
4.6
4.6
4. 2
4. 0
3.9
Correlation with
the Return on
a Market Index**

0. 54
0.63
0. 75
0.77
0. 79
0. 85
0. 88
0. 89
     * Wagner and Lau examined ten distinct portfolios
       for each level of diversification.   Thus the 3.9
       percent standard deviation at the 20-security
       diversification level is the average standard
       deviation of 10 randomly selected 20-security
       portfolios.

    ** The index in this case was the average return on
       all N. Y. Stock Exchange stocks.

       Source:  Wagner and Lau [28].
yields a rapidly diminishing reduction in risk.  The improve-

ment is slight when the number of securities is increased

beyond, say, ten.

     Note that the return on a diversified portfolio "follows

the market" very closely.  The 20-security portfolios had a
                          3-5

-------
correlation of 0.89 with the market (perfect positive corre-



lation results in a coefficient of 1.0).  The implication is



that the risk remaining in the 20-security portfolio is



predominantly a reflection of uncertainty about the performance



of the stock market in general.



     Thus, one is led to the distinction between a security's



unsystematic risk, which can be eliminated by diversification,



and its systematic risk, which cannot.  The relationship



between the two is illustrated in Figure 3-1.



     The systematic risk is due to the fact that the returr



on nearly every stock depends to some degree on the overall



performance of the stock market.   Investors are thus exposed



to "market uncertainty" no matter how many stocks they hold.



Consequently, the returns on diversified portfolios are



highly correlated with the market.








The Risk of Individual Securities



     Since the investor is interested in the risk of his



portfolio, he will judge the risk of any security by



assessing its contribution to the portfolio risk.



     However, the nature of this contribution depends on



how diversified the portfolio is.  At one extreme is the



investor who holds only one stock.  In this instance, the



portfolio risk can be measured by the standard deviation



of the stock's return.




     At the other extreme is the investor who holds "the



market", or a portfolio sufficiently diversified that its




                          3-6

-------
Standard
Deviation
Portfolio
Return
of
                                         Unsystematic or
                                         Diversifiable
                                             Systematic or
                                             Market-Related
                                             Risk
                                                       Number of
                                                       Stocks in
                                                       Portfolio
        Figure 3-1.   Systematic versus  unsystematic risk
                               3-7

-------
return is highly correlated with the market.  In this case,



standard deviation is not a good risk measure since some



fluctuations in the stock's return will tend to "cancel out"



against fluctuations in the returns on other securities.  A



stock that seems highly risky to an undiversified investor



may contribute very little to the risk of a diversified



portfolio.



     Obviously, the problem is to measure a stock's systematic



risk—that part of its risk that cannot be diversified awa).



     The key to the measurement is the fact that the risk cf



a diversified portfolio is predominantly a reflection on



uncertainty about the performance of the market.  Thus, in



measuring systematic risk we can concentrate on the extent



to which individual securities' returns depend on market



performance.



     This is why a stock's systematic risk is measured by its



beta (B) , sometimes called the "market sensitivity index".



Beta can be thought of as the slope of a line fitted to a



plot of rates of return on the stock versus rates of return



on a "market portfolio" composed of all stocks.   This is



shown in Figure 3-2.




     The hypothetical security shown in Figure 3-2 has a beta



of 1.   The  meaning of this is that, if the actual return 01



the market  is 101 in excess of expectations, the stock's



return will tend to be 10% above expectations.  To put it  n

-------
The Security's
Rate of Return
     R
            x
                  X
     3,  the  market  sensitivity
     index,  is  the  slope  of  the
     line.   In  this  case,  3=1.
                                                     R*
                                                  The Rate of
                                                  Return on
                                                  the Market
   Figure  3-2.
Calculation of a security's market sensitivity
index from past data.
                             3-9

-------
every-day terms, the price of a stock with 6=1 will tend



to rise 101 when the market rises 10%,  and fall 10% when the



market falls 10%.   An average stock will have a beta of 1.0.



     Consider a well-diversified portfolio made up of



securities having  g = 2.   The value of  such a portfolio will



tend to go up 20%  when the market goes  up 10%.   On the other



hand, if the market falls, the portfolio's value will fall by



double the amount.   Such  a portfolio will have  twice the



standard deviation of the market portfolio, and four times



the standard deviation of a portfolio composed  of stocks with



3=0.5.



     In other words, the  standard deviation of  a well-diversified



portfolio is approximately proportional to the  portfolio's beta.



Any portfolio's beta is simply a weighted average of the betas



of the securities  in the  portfolio.   Therefore, we can take a



stock's beta as a  measure of the stock's contribution to port-



folio risk, assuming the  portfolio is well diversified.



     The analysis  so far  can be summarized as follows:



     1.   The risk of a portfolio can be measured by the



          standard deviation of its rate of return.



     2.   The risk of an  individual security is its contri



          bution to portfolio risk.



     3.   The standard deviation of a stock's return is the



          relevant measure of risk for  the undiversified



          investor.
                          3-10

-------
     4.   However, a stock's standard deviation partly



          reflects unsystematic risk—risk that can be



          eliminated by diversification.   Only the systematic



          component of stock risk is relevant to the well



          diversified investor.



     5.   A stock's systematic risk is measured by its beta,



          or "market sensitivity index".



     Needless to say, there are investors holding only a



handful of stocks who cannot be described as either undiversi



fied or well diversified.  A stock's risk to such an investor



will depend on both its standard deviation and its beta.



     Since most investors have extensive opportunities for



diversification (even the proverbial widow or orphan can buy



a mutual fund), beta is usually considered the more relevant



risk measure.








Measuring Betas



     Obviously there is no risk in hindsight.  The investor



is worried about the unpredictability of the future return



on his portfolio, and in individual stocks' contributions to



this unpredictability.



     It is not feasible to obtain direct measurements of how



investors assess the risk of various stocks at this point in



time.  But these assessments will certainly depend on past




experience.  A stock's past behavior can provide  strong



evidence pertaining to its current and future risk.
                          3-11

-------
     The basic data for estimating betas are past rates of

return earned over relatively short intervals—usually weeks

or months.  For example, the beta calculations in Part 4

are based on monthly rates of return which occurred during

the period February 1962 to December 1974.

     Beta is calculated by fitting a straight line to a plot

of observed stock returns versus observed returns on the

market (see Figure 3-2).   The return on the market as a whcLe

is measured by a broadly based market index such as the

Standard and Poor's Composite 500 Stock Index.

     The equation of the fitted line is
          R.   =  a.   +  8. R,,  +  e .                     (3-2)
           1       1       J  M      3
where
     a.  =  the intercept of the fitted line

     e.  =  the variation around the fitted line
     /\
     6-  =  stock j's systematic risk


     It is customary to  put a hat (")  over the estimated values

a.,  a., and-e..   It  is important to remember that these estimated

values may differ from the true values because of statistical

difficulties.   However,  the extent of possible error can be

measured, providing a range within which the true value is

almost certain to lie.
                          3-12

-------
(h)   Basic Risk-Return Concepts:  The Capital _As_s_et



     Pricing Model



     In the past several years a great deal of empirical



research has been conducted on the relationship between risk



and rate of return in United States capital markets.  Several



dozen articles have been published, representing diverse



points of view.  However, there is a common theme in these



studies:  over long periods of time, higher risk securities



have, on the average, achieved higher rates of return.








The Capital Asset Pricing Model  (CAPM)



     The typical starting point for current research in this



area is the "capital asset pricing model".  According to the



model, E(R-), "the rate of return expected by shareholders of



the jt  firm, is equal to the rate on a risk-free asset (R£)



plus a risk-premium which is proportional to the security's




systematic risk  (3-J-  That is,



          E(R.)  =  R£ + 3j •  [E(RM) - R£]               (3-3)




     The constant of proportionality, [E (R,,) — R£] ,  is the



expected risk premium on the market portfolio.  The market



portfolio could be represented by the Standard and  Poor's



500 Stock Composite Index,for example, and  the risk-free rate



by yields on short-term treasury bills.



     The predictions of the model are inherently  sensible.




For safe investments (3- = 0), the model predicts that  inves-



tors would expect to earn the risk-free  rate of  interest.
                           3-13

-------
For a risky investment (6- > 0) investors would expect ;i rate



of return proportional to the stock's beta.  Thus stocks with



lower-than-average betas  (such as most utilities) would offer



expected returns less than the expected market return.



Stocks with above-average values of beta (such as most air-



line securities) would offer expected returns in excess of



the market.








Tests of the Capital Asset Pricing Model



     If the capital asset pricing model is  right, the em-



pirical tests should show the following:



     1.   On the average, and over long periods of time,  the



          securities with high systematic risk should have



          high rates of return.



     2.   On the average, there should be a linear relation-



          ship between systematic risk and  return.



     3.   Unsystematic risk should play no  significant role



          in explaining differences in security returns.



     These predictions have been tested in  several recent



statistical studies.  One such study was by Black, Jensen,



and Scholes [ 3 ].   Their  results showed that, over the 35-year



period from 1931 to 1965, average stock returns increased



with increasing betas, but not as much as predicted by the



capital asset pricing model.   Also, their results indicated



that there was little reason to question the linearity of  the



relationship over  the test period.  Figure  3-3 shows a plot of
                          3-14

-------
                         1931  —  1965
            .it
            .10
            .06
        to
        z
        o

        Ul
        cc
           .06-
           .04-
           .02-
           .00-
          -.02
                       T
                INIEfCErT
                 STD.ERfl.
            0.00519
            0.00053
                SLOPE    - 0.01C91
                 3TD.ERR. . O.COQSO
            0.0
        0.5       1.0
            STSTEHflTIC RISK
1.5
Figure  3-3.
Results  of Black,  Jensen and  Scholes Study-
Average  monthly  returns versus  systematic
risk  for the 35-year period 1931 1965  for
ten portfolios and the market  portfolio
(Black,  Jensen and Scholes  [3],  Figure  7,
p. 104).
                            3-15

-------
;iverat;e month returns for the Bl;irk, Jensen ;nu! Scholes



test portfolios versus their sys t OIIKI t i e risk



     Briefly,the major result of this and other studies can




he summarized as follows:



     1.   The evidence shows a significant positive relation-



          ship between realized returns and systematic risl .



          However, the relationship is  not always as strong



          as predicted by the capital asset pricing model.



     2.   The relationship between risk and return appears



          to be linear.   The studies give no evidence of



          significant curvature in the  risk-return.relation-



          ship .



     3.   Tests which attempt to discriminate between the



          effects of systematic and unsystematic risk do not



          yield definitive results.  Both kinds of risk



          appear to be positively  related to security returns.



          However, the relationship between return and un-



          systematic risk is at least partly spurious—that



          is, partly reflecting statistical problems rather



          than the true  nature of  capital markets.



     Obviously, one cannot claim that the capital asset pricing



model is absolutely right.  On the other hand, the empirical



tests do support the view that beta is  a useful risk measure



and that investors in high beta stocks  expect correspondingly



high rates of return.
                          3-16

-------
The Two-Factor Model




     The difficulty with the capital asset pricing model is




that the observed tradeoff between return and risk is smaller




than predicted.  In the Black, Jensen and Scholes tests, for




example, the average return during the 35-year test period




increased by approximately 1.08 percent per month for a one-




unit increase in beta; this is only about three quarters of




the amount predicted by the capital asset pricing model.




     Black  [ 2 ] has proposed a variant of the CAPM known as




the two factor model.  This model results from a somewhat




different theoretical reason but the result is structurally




similar.  In the two-factor model, the risk-free rate of the




CAPM is replaced by the expected return on a "zero-beta"




portfolio, designated ER_.   The model is given by




          ERj  =  ERZ + 0.  (ERM - ERZ)                 (3-4)





The R_ factor represents the expected return on a portfolio




whose returns are uncorrelated with the market.  This model




conforms to the empirical evidence much more closely than




the CAPM.  However, the theoretical nature of the R7 factor




is less well understood.
                          3-17

-------
                III.    RISK  AND THE  REQUIRED  RATE OF  RETURN*
    by Franco Modigliani and Gerald A. Pogue
   An  Introduction
                      to
   Risk  and  Return
    Concepts and  Evidence
                  1. Introduction
    Portfolio theory deals with the selection of optimal
    portfolios by rational risk-averse investors: that is,
    by investors who attempt to maximize their ex-
    pected portfolio returns consistent with individual-
    ly  acceptable  levels of portfolio  risk. Capital
    markets  theory deals with the implications for
    security prices  of the decisions  made by these in-
    vestors: that is, what relationship should exist be-
    tween security  returns and risk if investors behave
    in this  optimal fashion.  Together, portfolio and
    capital markets theories provide a framework for
    the specification and measurement of investment
    risk, for developing relationships between expected
    security return  and risk, and for measuring the per-
    formance of managed portfolios such as  mutual
    funds and pension funds.
      The purpose of this article is to present a non-
    technical introduction  to portfolio  and  capital
    markets theories. Our hope is to provide a wide
    class of readers with an understanding of the foun-
    Franco Modigliani is Professor of Finance, Sloan
    School of Management,  M.I.T. Gerald A.  Pogue is
    Professor of Finance at Baruch College, City Univer-
    sity of New York.  This  article was originally pre-
    pared as Chapter 2 of A. Study of Investment Perform-
    ance Fees (Heath-Lexington Books, forthcoming
    1974).  The research was supported by u grant from
    the Investment Company Institute, Washington, D.C.
    The  article  will also appear in  the forthcoming
    Financial Analysts Handbook (Sumner Levine, editor;
    to be published by Dow Jones-Irwin). Because of its
    length,  part of the article is deferred to  the next
 dation upon  which the modern  risk and  per-
 formance  measures are based, by presenting the
 main elements of the theory along with the results
 of some of the more important empirical tests. We
 are attempting to present not an exhaustive survey
 of  the theoretical  and empirical  literature,  but
 rather the main thread of the subject leading the
 reader from the most basic concepts to the more
 sophisticated but practically useful  results of the
 theory.

           2. Investment Return
 Measuring historical rates of return  is a relatively
 straightforward matter. We will begin by showing
 how investment return during a single interval can
 be  measured,  and then present  three  commonly
 used measures of average return over a series ol
 such intervals.
  The return  on an investor's portfolio during ;
 given interval is equal to the change in value of tht
 portfolio  plus any distributions received from the
 portfolio expressed as a fraction of the initial port-
 folio value. It is important that any  capital or in-
 come distributions  made to the  investor be  in-
 cluded,  or else the measure of return  will be
 deficient. Equivalently, the return can be thought
 of as the amount (expressed as a fraction of the
 initial portfolio value) that can be withdrawn at the
 end of the interval while maintaining the principal
 intact. The return on  the  investor's portfolio,
 designated RP, is given by
           RP =
                 V,  Vp + PI
(la
                                                where
  V, = the portfolio market value at the end of the
       interval
  V0 — the portfolio market value at the beginning
       of the interval
  D, = cash distributions to the investor during the
       interval.

  The calculation assumes  that any interest  or
dividend  income  received  on  the  portfolio
securities  and not distributed to  the investor is
reinvested in the  portfolio (and thus reflected in
V,). Furthermore,  the calculation assumes that any
*  Footnotes  and  references  for  this  section  appear  at  the  end of
   the articles.   Reproduced  with permission  of Authors  and  Publisher
                                            3-18

-------
distributions occur at the end of the interval, or are
held in the form of cash until the end of the in-
terval. If the distributions were reinvested prior to
the end of the interval, the calculation would have
to be modified to consider the gains or losses on
the amount reinvested.  The formula also assumes
no  capital inflows during the interval. Otherwise,
the calculation  would  have  to  be  modified  to
reflect the increased investment base. Capital in-
flows at the end of the  interval,  however, can be
treated as just the  reverse of distributions  in  the
return calculation.
  Thus given the beginning and ending portfolio
values, plus any  contributions from or distributions
to the investor (assumed to occur at the end of the
interval),  we  can compute  the  investors  return
using Equation (la). For example, if the XYZ pen-
sion fund had a  market value of $100,000 at  the
end of June, capital  contributions  of $10,000,
benefit payments of $5,000 (both at the end  of
July), and an end-of-July market value of $95,000,
the return for the month is a loss of 10 per cent.
  The arithmetic average return is an unweighted
average of the returns achieved during a series of
such  measurement  intervals. For  example, if  the
portfolio  returns [as measured by Equation (la)]
were  -10  per cent,  20 per cent, and 5 per cent in
July,   August,  and  September respectively,   the
average monthly return is 5 per cent. The general
formula is
             Rpl
                                 ^PN
                        N
where
  RA = the arithmetic average return
  RpK = the portfolio return  in
         interval k, k= 1,  .  ., N
  N  = the number of intervals in the performance-
         evaluation period.

The arithmetic average can be thought of as the
mean value of the withdrawals (expressed as a frac-
tion of the initial portfolio value) that can be made
at the end of each interval while maintaining the
principal intact. In the above example, the investor
must add 10 per cent of the principal at the end of
the first interval and can withdraw 20 per cent and
5 per cent  at the end of the  second  and third, for a
mean withdrawal of 5 per cent of the initial value
per period.
  The time-weighted return  measures  the com-
pound rate of growth of the initial portfolio during
the performance-evaluation period, assuming that
all  cash  distributions are reinvested in the port-
folio. It is also commonly  referred to  as  the
"geometric" rate of  return.  It is computed  by
taking the  geometric average  of the  portfolio
returns computed from Equation (la). For exam-
ple,  let  us  assume the portfolio returns  were  -10
per  cent, 20  per cent, and 5 per cent  in July,
August, and September, as in the  example above.
The  time-weighted rate of return is 4.3 per cent per
month. Thus one dollar invested in the portfolio at
the end of June  would have grown at  a rate of 4.3
per cent per month during the three-month period.
The  general formula is
RT= [(1
                       RP2) ...
where
  RT = the time-weighted rate of return
  RPK — tne portf0''0 return during the
         interval k, k= 1,  .. .,  N
  N   = the number of intervals in the performance-
         evaluation period.

  In  general, the  arithmetic  and  time-weighted
average returns do not coincide. This is because, in
computing the arithmetic average, the amount  in-
vested is assumed to be maintained (through ad-
ditions  or  withdrawals)  at  its initial  value. The
time-weighted return, on the  other hand,  is the
return on a portfolio that varies in size because of
the assumption  that  all  proceeds are reinvested.
The  failure of  the two  averages to  coincide  is
illustrated  in the  following example:  Consider a
portfolio with a $100 market value  at the end of
1972, a $200 value at the end of 1973, and a $100
value at the end of 1974. The annual returns are
100 per cent and -50 per cent. The arithmetic and
time-weighted average returns are 25 per cent and
zero per cent respectively. The arithmetic average
return consists of the average of $100 withdrawn at
the end of Period 1, and $50 replaced at the end of
Period  2. The compound rate of return  is clearly
zero, the 100 per  cent return in  the first  period
being exactly offset by the 50 per cent loss in the
second  period  on  the  larger  asset  base.  In this
example the arithmetic average exceeded the time-
weighted average return. This always proves to be
true,  except  in the  special   situation where  the
returns  in each interval are the same, in which case
the averages are identical.
  The dollar-weighted return  measures the average
rate of growth of all funds invested in the portfolio
during the performance-evaluation period—that is,
the initial value  plus any  contributions less any dis-
                                              3-19

-------
 tnbutions. As such, the rate  is influenced  by the
 timing and magnitude of the contributions and dis-
 tributions to and from  the portfolio. The measure
 is also commonly referred to  as the "internal rate
 of return."  It  is  important  to corporations, for
 example, for comparison with  the actuarial rates of
 portfolio growth assumed when funding their em-
 ployee pension plans.
   The dollar-weighted  return is computed in ex-
 actly the same way that the yield to maturity on a
 bond  is  determined. For example, consider a port-
 folio with market  value of $100,000 at the end of
 1973 (V,,), capital withdrawals of $5,000 at the end
 of 1974, 1975, and 1976 (C,, C,, and C:)), and a
 market value of $110,000 at the end of 1976 (V:l).
 Using  compound  interest   tables, the  dollar-
 weighted rate of return is found by trial and error
 to  be  8.1 per  cent per year during the three-year
 period. Thus each dollar in the fund grew  at  an
 average  rate  of 8.1 per  cent per year. The formula
 used is

       .,       C,          C,
                       (I+RD)2
               c,
            (l+RD)a
                                             (Id)
 where
   Rp = the dollar-weighted rate of return.

   What  is the relationship between the dollar-
 weighted return (internal  rate of return) and  the
 previously defined time-weighted rate of return? It
 is easy  to  show that under certain special con-
 ditions both rates of return are the same. Consider,
 for example, a portfolio  with initial total value  V0.
 No further  additions  or  withdrawals occur and all
 dividends are reinvested. Under these special cir-
 cumstances all of the  C's in Equation (Id) are zero
 so that
                     PI'
                             P2'
                                     P.V
 where  RP's  are the  single-period  returns.  The
 numerator of the expression on the right is just the
 value of the initial  investment  at the end  of the
 three ptriods (V:l).  Solving for RD we find

      R =[(1 +RP|)(I + Rp2)(l+Rp3)]'/:' -I ,

 which  is the same  as the time-weighted rate of
 return RT given  by  Equation (Ic). However, when
contributions or withdrawals to the  portfolio oc-
cur,  the two rates   of return are not  the  same.
 Because  the  dollar-weighted  return  (unlike  I  e
 time-weighted return) is affected by the magnitu  c
 and timing of portfolio contributions and distrih  i-
 tions (which  are typically beyond the  portfo'. o
 manager's control),  it is not useful for measurii g
 the  investment  performance of the manager.  FIT
 example, consider two identical portfolios (desig-
 nated A and B) with year-end  1973 market values
 of $100,000. During 1974 each portfolio has a 20
 per  cent  return. At  the end of 1974, portfolio A
 has a capital contribution of $50,000 and portfolio
 B a withdrawal of  $50,000. During 1975,  both
 portfolios suffer a  10 per cent loss  resulting in
 year-end  market values of $153,000 and $63,000
 respectively. Now, both  portfolio  managers per-
 formed equally  well, earning 20 per cent in \9~ \
 and -10  per  cent  in  1975, for a  time-weighu 1
 average return of 3.9 per cent per year. The dollai -
 weighted  returns are not the same, however, due to
 the different asset bases for 1975, equaling  1.2 per
 cent and 8.2 per cent for portfolios A  and B
 respectively. The owners  of portfolio B,  unlike
 those of  A, made a fortuitous decision to  reduce
 their investment prior to the  1975 decline.
  In the  remainder  of this  article, when  we men-
 tion rate of  return, we will generally  be referring to
 the single interval measure given by Equation (la).
 However, from  time to time  we will refer to the
 arithmetic and geometric averages of these returns.

               3. Portfolio Risk
 The definition  of investment  risk  leads  us into
 much  less well  explored territory.  Not everyone
 agrees on how  to define  risk, let  alone  how to
 measure it.  Nevertheless, there are some attribute1
 of risk  which are reasonably well accepted.
  If an  investor holds  a  portfolio  of  treasun
 bonds,  he faces no  uncertainty about  monetan
 outcome. The value  of the portfolio  at maturity of
 the notes will be identical with the predicted value.
 In this case the investor bears  no  monetary  risk.
 However, if he  has a portfolio composed of com-
 mon stocks, it will be impossible to exactly predict
 the value of the portfolio as of any future date. The
 best he can do  is to make a  best guess or most-
 likely estimate,  qualified by statements about  the
 range and likelihood of other values. In this case,
 the investor does bear  risk.
  One measure  of risk is the  extent to which  the
future portfolio values are  likely to diverge from
 the expected or  predicted value. More specifically,
 risk for most investors is related to the chance that
 future  portfolio  values  will  be  less than expected.
                                             3-20

-------
Thus if the investor's portfolio has a current value
of $ 100,000, and an expected value of $ 110,000 at
the end of the next year, he  will be concerned
about the probability of achieving values less than
$110,000.
   Before proceeding to the quantification of risk,
it  is convenient to shift our attention from the ter-
minal value of the portfolio to the portfolio rate of
return,  Rp,  since  the increase  in portfolio value
is  directly related to Rp.'
   A particularly useful way to quantify the un-
certainty about the portfolio return is to specify the
probability  associated  with each  of the possible
future returns.  Assume, for example,  that an  in-
vestor has identified five possible outcomes for his
portfolio return during the  next year. Associated
with  each  return  is  a subjectively  determined
probability, or relative chance of occurrence. The
five possible outcomes are:
      Possible Return
          50%
          30%
          10%
          -10%
          -30%
                    Subjective Probability
                            Ol
                            0.2
                            0.4
                            0.2
                            0.1
                            1.00
 Note that the probabilities sum to 1.00 so that the
 actual portfolio  return is  confined  to  take one of
 the five possible  values. Given this probability dis-
 tribution, we can measure the expected return and
 risk for the portfolio.
   The  expected  return   is  simply  the  weighted
 average of  possible outcomes, where  the  weights
 are  the relative  chances  of  occurrence. The  ex-
 pected return on the portfolio is 10 per cent, given
 by
              5
   E(Rn
•=  L
P,  R,
        =   0.1  (50.0)  + 0.2 (30.0)  + 0.4 (10.0)
             + 0.2 (-10.0) + 0.1 (-30.0)
        =   10%,                            (2)
where the R,'s  are the possible  returns and the P/s
the associated  probabilities.
   If  risk is defined as  the  chance  of achieving
returns less than expected, it  would  seem  to  be
logical to  measure  risk  by the dispersion  of the
possible  returns below  the  expected  value.
However, risk  measures based  on below-the-mean
variability are  difficult  to  work with  and are ac-
                                                                ExmeiT 1
                                                        POSSIBLE SHAPES FOR
                                                     PROBABILITY D03TR8BUTIONS

                                                Symmetric Probability Distribution
                                               Prob
                                                Probability Distribution Skewed to Left
                                               Prob
                                      Probability Distribution Skewed to Right
                                                      Prob
   I. Footnotes appear at  end  of article.
tually  unnecessary  as long as the distribution of
future return is reasonably symmetric about the ex-
pected value.2  Exhibit  I  shows  three  probability
distributions:  the  first symmetric,  the  second
skewed to the left, and the  third skewed to the
right. For a symmetric  distribution, the dispersion
of returns on one side of the expected return is the
same as the dispersion  on  the other side.
  Empirical  studies of  realized rates of return  on
diversified portfolios show  that skewness  is  not a
significant problem.1'  If future  distributions are
shaped like historical distributions, then  it makes
little difference whether we measure variability of
returns on one  or both sides of the expected return.
If  the probability  distribution  is  symmetric,
measures  of  the total variability of return will be
twice  as  large as  measures of  the portfolio's
variability below the  expected return. Thus if total
variability is  used  as  a  risk  surrogate,  the  risk
rankings for a group of portfolios will be the  same
as when  variability below  the expected  return  is
used. It is for  this  reason  that total variability ol
                                               3-21

-------


1
2
3
4


7

m
11
1 2



17
18
19
20


RATE OF RETURN
RANGE
-13.6210 -12.2685
-12.2685 -10.9160
-10.9160 -9.5635
-9.5635 -8.2110


.5060 -4. IOOD


-0.0960 1.2565


5O-1 ACl R fififiC;

8.0190 9.3715
9.3715 10.7240
10.7240 12.0765
12.0765 13.4290
SCALING FACTOR = 1
Average Return = 0.91% per
Standard Deviation = 4.45%
Number of Observations = 3
EXHIBIT 2
I DISTRIBUTION FOR A PORTFOLIO OF 100 SECURITIES
(EQUALLY WEIGHTED)
January 1945 - June 1970
FREQ. 1 i i i 5 i i n10i i i |15, , i |20, , , ,25, , , ,30| , , (35| i i |40, , , |45| , , ,50|
1 *
2 **
2 **
3 8**





30 ******************************




4 * ***
2 **
2 8*
3 ***

month
per month
06
returns has been so widely used as a surrogate for
risk.
  It now remains to choose a specific measure of
total  variability of  returns.  The measures  most
commonly  used are  the variance and standard
deviation of returns.
  The variance of return is a weighted sum of the
squared  deviations  from  the  expected  return.
Squaring the  deviations ensures  that  deviations
above and below  the expected  value  contribute
equally to the measure of variability, regardless of
sign. The variance, designated  )
= 0.1(50.0 -
   + 0.4(10.0- io.o)2  + o.iT-'ro.o
   + O.H-30.0 -  IO.O)2
= 480 per cent squared.
                                      10.0)-
                                             (3)
The standard  deviation  (erp)  is  defined  as  the
square root of the variance. It is equal to 22 per
cent. The larger the variance or standard deviation,
the greater  the possible  dispersion  of future
realized values around the expected value, and the
larger  the investor's  uncertainty.  As  a  rule  of
thumb  for  symmetric  distributions,  it is often
suggested that  roughly two-thirds of  the  possible
returns will lie within one standard deviation either
side of  the expected value, and that  95 per cent
will be  within two standard delations.
   Exhibit 2  shows the historical return distribu-
tions  for  a diversified  portfolio.  The portfolio  is
composed  of approximately  100  securities, with
each security having equal weight. The  month-by-
month returns cover the period ftS'm January 1945
to June  1970. Note that the distribution is approxi-
mately,  but not  perfectly,  symmetric. The arith-
metic average return for the 306-month period  is
0.91 per cent per month.  The standard deviation
about this average is 4.45 per cent per month.
                                            3-22

-------
EXH6BIT 3
RATE OF RETURN D9STRIBUTION FOR NATIONAL
DEPARTMENT STORES
January 1945 - June 1970
RANGE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Q


1 9
1 ^



1 7
1 fl
19
20
-32.3670
-29.4168
-26.4666
-23.5163
-20.5661
-17.6159
-14 Rfi^7
-11 71 £>f\
_Q 7fie;Q


OnftCLQ
o nQRC
5QQCT




20.7366
23.6868
-29.4168
-26.4666
-23.5163
-20.5661
-17.6159
-14.6657
-11 71 ^R

_C Q1 CH



5QQC T



1 7 7AfiR
on 7Tfifi
23.6868
26.6370
FREQ. 1I1I5III 1101 1 1 1151 1 1 1201 1 1 1251 1 1 1301 1 1 1351 1 1 1401 1 ' 145' 1 1 '50
1
0
0
1
1
3






25




5
2
8


8
8
8«*











8 ****
8*
SCALING FACTOR = 1


Average
Standard
Return = 081% per month
Deviation = 9
Number of Observations
02% per
= 306
month

  Exhibit  3 gives the  same  data  for  a single
security. National  Department  Stores. Note  that
the  distribution is  highly skewed.  The arithmetic
average return  is 0 81 per cent  per  month over the
306-month  period. The  most  interesting aspect,
however, is the standard deviation of month-by-
month  returns—9.02  per cent  per month,  more
than double that lor the diversified portfolio.  This
result will be discussed further in the next  section.
  Thus far our discussion of portfolio  risk  has
been  confined to  a  single-period  investment
horizon such as the next year; that  is, the portfolio
is held unchanged and evaluated  at the end ot the
year.  An obvious question relates  to the  effect of
holding the portfolio  for several  periods—say for
the  next 20 years: Will the one-year risks tend to
cancel  out  over time'.'  Given  the random-walk
nature  of  security  prices,  the  answer   to   this
question is  no.  If the risk level (standard deviation)
is maintained during each year, the portfolio  risk
for  longer horizons will  increase  with the  horizon
length. The standard deviation of possible terminal
portfolio values after N years is equal  toVN times
the standard deviation after one year.' Thus the in-
vestor cannot  rely on the "long run" to reduce his
risk of loss.
  A final remark should  be made before leaving
portfolio risk  measures.  We  have  implicitly
assumed  that  investors are risk averse,  i.e., that
they seek to  minimize risk  for  a given  level  ol
return. This  assumption appears to  be valid for
most investors in  most situations. The entire theory
of portfolio selection and  capital asset pricing is
based on the belief that investors on the  average
are risk  averse.

               4.  Diversification
When one  compares the distribution of historical
returns for the  100-stock portfolio (Exhibit 2) with
the distribution  for  National  Department Stores
(Exhibit  3),  he discovers  a curious relationship.
While  the  standard deviation  of returns lor the
                                               3-23

-------
security is double that of the portfolio, its average
return is less. Is the market so imperfect that over a
long period of time (25 years) it rewarded substan-
tially higher risk with lower  average return?
  Not  so. As we shall  now  show,  not  all of the
security's risk is relevant. Much of the total  risk
(standard deviation of return) of National  Depart-
ment Stores  was diversifiable.  That is, if it  had
been combined with other securities, a portion of
the  variation  in  its  returns  could have  been
smoothed  out  or  cancelled  by complementary
variation in the other  securities. The same port-
folio diversification  effect  accounts for  the  low
standard deviation  of  return for the  100-stock
portfolio. In  fact, the portfolio standard deviation
was  less than that of  the typical  security in  the
portfolio. Much of the total  risk  of the component
securities had been eliminated  by diversification.
Since much of the total risk could be eliminated
simply by holding a stock in a portfolio, there  was
no economic requirement for the return earned to
be in line with the total risk.  Instead, we should ex-
pect realized returns to be  related to that portion
of security  risk which  cannot  be  eliminated  by
portfolio combination.
  Diversification results from combining securities
having  less than perfect correlation  (dependence)
among  their  returns in  order to reduce portfolio
risk. The portfolio return, being simply a weighted
average of the individual security returns, js  not
diminished  by diversification. In  general, the lower
the correlation among security returns, the greater
the impact of diversification. This is true regardless
of how risky the  securities  of  the  portfolio  are
when considered in isolation.
   Ideally, if we could find sufficient securities with
uncorrelated  returns,  we  cculd  completely
eliminate  portfolio  risk.  This  situation  is  un-
fortunately  not  typical in real  securities markets
where  returns are positively correlated to  a  con-
siderable degree. Thus while portfolio risk  can be
substantially reduced by diversification, it  cannot
be entirely eliminated.  This  can be demonstrated
very clearly by measuring the standard deviations
of randomly selected portfolios containing various
numbers of securities.
  In a study of the impact of portfolio diversifica-
tion on risk, Wagner and Lau [27]* divided  a sam-
ple of  200 NYSE stocks into six subgroups based
on the Standard and Poor's Stock Quality Ratings
as of June  1960.  The highest quality ratings (A+ )
formed the  first group, the second highest  rating?
(A) the next group, and so on.  Randomly selectei
portfolios were formed from each of the subgroup^
containing  from  1 to 20 securities. The month-b}
month  portfolio  retu.ns  for the I0-ye;u  perioi
through May  1970 were then computed  for eac!
portfolio (portfolio  composition re;n-iir'ng   un
changed). The exercise was repeated ten  times u>
reduce the  dependence on single samples, and the
values  for the ten trials were then averaged.
  Table  1  shows the average return and  standard
deviation for  portfolios from  the  first  subgroup
(A+   quality  stocks).  The  average return  is
unrelated to the number of issues in the portfolio.
On the  other  hand,  the  standard deviation  of
return  declines  as the  number of holdings  in-
creases. On the average, approximately 40 per cent
of the  single security risk is eliminated by forming
randomly  selected  portfolios of  20  stocks.

  * References appear at end of article.
TABLE 1. RISK
VERSUS DIVERSIFICATION FOR RANDOMLY *
SELECTED PORTFOLIOS OF

Number of

Portfolio
1
2
3
4 *"-*'^5&
5
• ! JQ
,W'¥s
""' 20
Source: Wagner

Average

(%/month)
0.88
0.69
0.74
wssffZS^'*'- • 0.65
0.71
0.68
0.69
0.67
and Lau [ 27) , Table C,
A+ QUALITY SECURITIES
June 1960— May 1970
Std. Deviation

(%/month)
7.0
5.0
4.8
4.6
4.6
4.2
4.0
3.9
p. 53.


Correlation

R
0.54
0.63
0.75
0.77
0.79
0.85
0.88
0.89



with Market

R2
0.29
0.40
0-56..,
0.59
0.62
0.72
0.77
0.80

                                               3-24

-------
                    EXHIBIT 4
         STANDARD DEVSATION VERSUS
        NUMBER OF ISSUES 9N PORTFOLIO
 STANDARD
 DEVIATION
    12
       12345       10      15       20
      Source: Wagner and Lau [27], Exhibit 1, p.50.
                    EXHIBIT 8
       CORRELATION VERSUS NUMBER OF
              ISSUES IN PORTFOLIO
 R-SQUARE
        12345       10      15      20
      Source: Wagner and Lau [27), Exhibit 2, p.50.
However, it is also evident that additional diversi-
fication  yields  rapidly  diminishing  reduction in
risk. The improvement is slight when the number
of securities held  is  increased  beyond, say, 10.
Exhibit  4 shows the results  for  all  six  quality
groups. The figure shows the rapid decline in total
portfolio risk as the portfolios are expanded from 1
to 10 securities.
  Returning to Table I, we note from  the next to
last column in the table that the return  on a diver-
sified portfolio  follows  the  market  very closely.
The  degree  of association  is  measured by the
correlation coefficient (R) of each  portfolio with
an unweighted index of all NYSE stocks (perfect
positive correlation results in  a correlation coeffi-
cient  of  1.0).n  The  20-security  portfolio  has  a
correlation  of 0.89  with  the  market.  The  im-
plication is that the risk  remaining in the 20-stock
portfolio  is  predominantly  a  reflection of  un-
certainty  about  the   performance  of   the  stock
market  in general. Exhibit 5 shows the  results for
the six quality groups.
  Correlation in Exhibit 5 is represented by the
correlation coefficient squared, R'2 (possible values
range from 0 to  1.0). The  R2 coefficient has  a
useful interpretation:  it measures the proportion of
variability in portfolio return that is attributable to
variability  in   market  returns.  The  remaining
variability is risk, which is unique to the  portfolio
and, as  Exhibit 4 shows, can be eliminated by
proper diversification of the  portfolio.  Thus, R-
measures the degree of portfolio diversification. A
poorly diversified portfolio will have a  small R-
(0.30 - 0.40). A  well diversified portfolio  will  have
a much higher R'2 (0.85   0.95). A perfectly diver-
sified portfolio will have  an R2 of 1.0; that is, all
the risk in such a portfolio is a reflection of market
risk. Exhibit 5 shows the  rapid gain  in diversifica-
tion as  the  portfolio is  expanded  from 1   to  2
securities and  up  to  10 securities.  Beyond  10
securities the gains tend to be  smaller.  Note that
increasing the number of issues tends to be less ef-
ficient  at achieving diversification for the highest
quality A +  issues. Apparently the companies com-
                                              3-25

-------
prising this group arc more homogeneous than the
companies grouped under  the other quality codes.
   THfc Ifestflts show that while some risks can  he
eliminated via diversification, others cannot. Thus
we are led to distinguish between a security's "un-
systematic" risk,  which can be  washed  away  by
mixing the security with other securities in a diver-
sified portfolio, and  its "systematic'1  risk, which
cannot  be eliminated  by  diversification.  This
proposition is  illustrated  in Exhibit 6.  It shows
total  portfolio  risk declining  as the number  of
holdings   increases.  Increasing diversification
gradually  tends  to eliminate the unsystematic risk,
leaving only systematic, i.e.,  market-related risk.
The remaining variability results from the fact that
the return on  nearly  every security  depends  to
some  degree on the  overall  performance of the
market. Consequently, the  return on a well diver-
sified   portfolio  is  highly correlated  with the
market,  and  its  variability   or uncertainty  is
basically the uncertainty of the market as a whole.
Investors  are  exposed  to  market uncertainty  no
matter how many stocks they hold.

    5. The Risk of Individual Securities
In  the  previous section we  concluded  that the
systematic  risk of an individual security is that por-
tion of its  total  risk (standard deviation of return)
which cannot be eliminated by combining it with
other  securities  in a well diversified  portfolio. We
now need a way of quantifying the systematic risk
of a security  and  relating the  systematic risk of a
portfolio to that of its component securities. This
can be  accomplished by dividing security  return
into two   parts:  one   dependent (i.e.,  perfectly
correlated), and  a second  independent  (i.e., un-
correlated) of market return. The first component
of return is usually referred to as  "systematic", the
second as "unsystematic" return. Thus we have
  Security  Return = Systematic Return
                   + Unsystematic Return.     (4)

   Since   the  systematic   return  is   perfectly
correlated  with  the  market return,  it  can be ex-
pressed as a factor, designated beta  (ft), times the
market  return,  Rm.  The beta  factor is  a market
sensitivity  index,  indicating  how  sensitive the
security return  is  to changes in the market  level.
The unsystematic  return, which is independent  of
market returns,  is usually  represented  by a factor
epsilon  (e'). Thus the  security return, R, may  be
expressed
                   EXHIiST 8
     SYSTEMATIC AND UNSYSTEMATIC RISK
                              Unsystemat c or
                              Diversiflabl'  Risk
                                   'Systematic or
                                   Market-Related
                                   Risk
  For example, if a security had a /? factor of 2.0
(e.g., an  airline  stock), then  a  10 per cent  market
return would generate a systematic return  for the
stock of 20 per cent. The security return  for the
period would be  the  20  per  cent  plus the  un-
systematic  component.  The  unsystematic com-
ponent depends on factors  unique to the company,
such as  labor  difficulties,  higher  than  expected
sales, etc.
  The security  returns  model  given by Equation
(5) is usually written, in a way such that the average
value of the  residual term, e',  is zero. This is ac-
complished  by  adding a factor,  alpha (a), to the
model  to represent  the  average  value of the  un-
systematic returns over time. That  is. we set e' =
a + e so that
            R =  a +  /3 Rm
+ e
where the average e over time  is equal to zero
  The  model  for  security  returns  given  by
Equation (6) is  usually referred to as the  "market
model". Graphically, the model can be depicted a;
a line  fitted  to  a plot  of security returns againsi
rates of return on the market index. This is showr
in Exhibit  7  for a hypothetical security.
  The beta factor can be thought of as the slope ol
the line.  It gives the expected increase in security
return for a one  per cent increase in market return.
In Exhibit 7, the security has a beta of 1.0. Thus, a
ten per  cent market  return will result,  on the
average,  in  a ten per  cent security  return. The
                                              3-26

-------
                                              EXHIBIT 7
                           THE MARKET MODEL FOR SECURITY RETURNS
                    Security
                    Return
                                                                            Market Return R m
                       Beta (p), the market sensitivity index, is the slope of
                       the line.

                       Alpha (a), the average of the residual returns, is the
                       intercept of the line on the security axis.

                       Epsilon (e), the residual returns, are the perpendicular
                       distances of the points from the line.
market-weighted average beta for all stocks is  1.0
by definition.
  The alpha factor is represented by the intercept
of the line on the vertical security return axis. It is
equal  to  the average value over  time  of the  un-
systematic returns  (e') on  the  stock.  For most
stocks, the alpha  factor tends to  be small  and  un-
stable. (We shall  return to alpha  later.)
   Using the definition of security return given by
the market  model, the specification of systematic
and unsystematic  risk is straightforward—they arc
simply the  standard  deviations  of the two return
components."
  The systematic  risk  of  a  security is equal  to /3
                                                 3-27

-------
times the standard deviation of the market return:
            Systematic Risk =/3am             (7)
The  unsystematic risk  equals  the  standard
deviation of the residual  return factor e:
           Unsystematic Risk = vf             (8)
  Given measures of individual security systematic
risk, we can now compute  the systematic risk of
portfolio. It is equal to the beta factor for the port-
folio, /?p,  times the risk of the market index, 
-------
security systematic risk is equal to the security beta
times  \
                                                  
-------
[4]   Brealey, Richard  A.  An  Introduction  to  Risk and
      Return from Common Stocks. (Cambridge, Mass.: MIT
      Press,  1969.)
[5]   Fama,  Eugene  F. "Components  of  Investment  Per-
      formance." The Journal of Finance, Vol. XXVII (June
      1972), pp.  551-567.
[6]   Fama, Eugene F., and MacBeth, James  D. "Risk, Return
      and Equilibrium: Empirical Tests." Unpublished Working
      Paper No. 7237, University of Chicago, Graduate School
      of  Business, August 1972.
[7]   Francis,   Jack   C.  Investment   Analysis  and
      Management. (New  York:  McGraw-Hill, 1972.)
[8J   Friend,  Irwin, and Blume,  Marshall E.  "Risk  and the
      Long Run  Rate  of Return on  NYSE Common  Stocks."
      Working Paper No 18-72, Wharton School of Commerce
      and Finance,  Rodney  L.  White  Center for Financial
      Research.
[9]   Jacob, Nancy. "The Measurement of Systematic  Risk for
      Securities and Portfolios: Some  Empirical  Results." Jour-
      nal of Financial  and Quantitative Analysis,  Vol VI
      (March  1971), pp. 815-834.
[10]  Jensen,  Michael C. "The Performance of Mutual Funds in
      the Period 1945-1964." Journal of Finance, Vol. XXI11
      (May 1968), pp. 389-416.
[11]  Jensen,  Michael C. "Risk, the Pricing ot  Capital Assets,
      and the Evaluation of Investment Portfolios." Journal of
      Business, Vol. 42 (April 1969),  pp. 167-247.
[12]  Jensen,  Michael  C   "Capital  Markets: Theory  and
      Evidence."  The   Bell Journal  of Economics  and
      Management Science, Vol. 3 (Autumn 1972), pp.  357-
      398.
[13]  Levy, Robert A. "On the Short Term Stationarity of Beta
      Coefficients."  Financial  Analysts Journal,  Vol. 27
      (November-December 1971), pp. 55-62.
[14]  Lintner, John. "The  Valuation of Risk  Assets  and the
      Selection of Risky Investments in Stock  Portfolios and
      Capital  Budgets"  Review of Economics and Statistics,
      Vol. XLV1I (February 1965),  pp.  13-37
[15]  Lintner. John. "Security Prices, Risk, and  Maximal Gains
      from Diversification." Journal of Finance, Vol. XX
      (December  1965), pp.  587-616.
[16]  Mains, Norman E. "Are Mutual Fund Beta Coefficients
      Stationary?"  Unpublished  Working  Paper, Investment
      Company Institute, Washington,  D.C., October  1972.
[17]  Markowitz,  Harry M.  "Portfolio Selection." Journal i'f
      Finance, Vol  VII (March  1952), pp. 77-91.
[18]  Markowitz,  Harry  M.  Portfolio  Selection:  Efficient
      Diversification of Investments.  (New York: John Wile>
      and Sons, 1959.)
[19]  Miller, Merton  H.,  and Scholes,  Myron  S. "Rates of
      Returns in Relation to  Risk: A Reexamination of Recent
      Findings." Published in  Studies in the Theory of Capital
      Markets, edited by Michael  Jensen. (New York: Praeger.
      1972),  pp. 47-78.
[20]  Modigliani, Franco, and Pogue, Gerald A. A  Study of In-
      vestment Performance Fees. (Lexington, Mass.: Heath-
      Lexington Books. Forthcoming 1974.)
[21 ]  Pogue,  Gerald A., and Conway, Walter. "On the Stability
      of  Mutual  Fund  Beta  Values."  Unpublished  Working
      Paper,  MIT,  Sloan School of Management,  June  1972
[22]  Securities and Exchange  Commission,  Institutional  In-
      vestor  Study  Report of the Securities  and Exchange
      Commission, Chapter 4, "Investment Advisory  Com-
      plexes", pp. 325-347. (Washington, D.C.: U.S. Govern-
      ment Printing Office, 1971.)
[23]  Sharpe, William F. "Capital Asset Prices:  A Theory of
      Market Equilibrium under Conditions of Risk."  Journal
      of Finance,  Vol. XIX (September 1964), pp.  425-442.
[24]  Sharpe,  William F. Portfolio  Theory  and   Capital
      Markets. (New  York:  McGraw-Hill,  1970.)
[25]  Treynor, Jack L. "How to Rate  the Management of In-
      vestment Funds." Harvard Business Review, Vol. XLII1
      (January-February  1965), pp. 63-75.
[26]  Treynor, Jack L. "The  Performance ol Mutual  Funds in
      the Period  1945-1964: Discussion." Journal of  Finance,
      Vol.  XXHI (May  1968). pp. 418-419.
[27]  Wagner, Wayne H., and Lau,  Sheila. "The Effect  of
      Diversification  on  Risk."  Financial Analysts  Journal,
      Vol.  26 (November-December 1971),  pp. 48-53.
                                                      3-30

-------
  by Franco Modigliani and Gerald A. Pogue
 An  Introduction
                     to
 Risk  and  Return
Concepts  and  Evidence  - II
           6. The Relationship Between
            Expected Return and Risk:
         The Capital Asset Pricing Model*
  The first part of this article developed two
  measures of risk: one  is a measure of total risk
  (standard deviation), the other a relative index of
  systematic or nondiversifiable risk (beta). Thfe beta
  measure would appear to be the more relevant for
  the pricing of securities. Returns expected by in-
  vestors should logically be related to systematic as
  opposed to total risk.  Securities with higher sys-
  tematic risk should have higher expected returns.'
    The question to be considered now is the form of
  the relationship between risk and return. In this
  section  we describe  a  relationship  called  the
  "Capital Asset  Pricing  Model" (CAPM), which is
  based on elementary logic and simple economic
  principles. The basic postulate underlying finance
  theory is that assets with the same risk should have

    1. Footnotes appear at  end  of article.

  * This article is the second part of a two-part article
    which was originally prepared as Chapter 2 of A
    Study of  Investment  Performance Fees (Heath-
    Lexington Books, forthcoming 1974).  The  re-
  i  search was supported  by a grant from the Invest-
    ment Company Institute,  Washington,  D.C, The
    article will also appear in  the forthcoming Finan-
    cial Analysts Handbook (Sumner Levine, editor; to
    be published  by  Dow  Jones-Irwin).  Franco
    Modigliani is Professor of Finance, Sloan School
    of Management, M.I.T. Gerald Pogue is Professor
    of Finance at Baruch  College, City University of
    New  York.
the same expected rate of return. That is, the prices
of assets in the capital markets should adjust until
equivalent risk  assets have  identical  expected
returns.
  To see the implications of this postulate, let us
consider an investor who holds a risky portfolio2
with the same risk  as the market portfolio (beta
equal  to 1.0). What return should  he  expect?
Logically, he should expect the same return as that
of the market portfolio.
  Let us consider another  investor who  holds a
riskless portfolio (beta equal to zero). The investor
in this case should expect to earn the rate of return
on riskless assets such as  treasury bills. By taking
no risk, he earns the riskless rate of return.
  Now let us consider the case of an  investor who
holds a mixture  of these two portfolios. Assuming
he invests a proportion X of his money in the risky
portfolio and (1  -  X)  in  the riskless portfolio,
wtiat risk does he bear and  what return should he
expect?  The risk' of the composite portfolio  is
easily •computed when we recall that the beta of a
portfolio is simply a weighted average of the com-
ponerit ^security  betas, where the  weights are the
portfolio proportions. Thus  the portfolio beta, j8p,
is a weighted average of the beta of the market
portfolio and  the   beta  of the  risk-free  rate.
However, the market beta is 1.0, and that of the
risk-free rate is  zero. Therefore
                       0 + X
              = X.
                    (11)
Thus /3p is equal to the fraction of his money in-
vested in the risky portfolio. If 100 per cent or less
of the investor's funds is invested in the risky port-
folio, his portfolio beta will  be between zero  and
1.0. If he borrows at the risk-free rate and invests
the proceeds  in the  risky portfolio, his portfolio
beta will  be  greater than 1.0.
  The expected return of the composite portfolio
is also a weighted average of the expected returns
on the two-component portfolios;  that is,
RF + X  • E(Rm),
                                        (12)
 where E(Rp), E(Rm), and Rf are the expected re-
 turns on the portfolio, the  market index, and the
 risk-free rate. Now, from Equation (11) we know
                                            3-31

-------
 that  X is equal to /3p. Substituting into Equation
 (12), we  have
            = (1-/3P)  • Rf + ftp -  E(Rm),
       E(RP) = RF + ftp  . (E(Rm) - RF)       (13)
   Equation (13) is the Capital Asset  Pricing Model
 (CAPM),  an  extremely  important  theoretical
 result.  It says that the expected return on a port-
 folio should exceed the riskless rate of return by an
 amount which is proportional to the portfolio beta.
 That is,  the  relationship between return and risk
 should be linear.
   The  model is  often  stated in  "risk-premium"
 form. Risk premiums are obtained by subtracting
 the risk-free rate from the rates of return. The ex-
 pected  portfolio and  market   risk  premiums
 (designated E(rp) and E(rm) respectively) are given
 by
              E(rp) = E(RP) - RF,             (14a)

             E(rm) = E(RM)  - RF.             (14b)
 Substituting these risk  premiums into  Equation
 (13), we obtain
              E(rp) = ftp • E(rm).              (15)
 In this form, the CAPM states that the expected
 risk premium for the investor's portfolio is equal to
 its  beta  value times the  expected  market risk
 premium.
   We can  illustrate  the model by assuming that
 short-term (risk-free) interest rate is 6 per cent and
 the  expected  return on the market is 10 per cent.
 The expected risk premium for holding the market
 portfolio is just the difference between the 10 per
 cent and the short-term  interest rate  of 6 per cent,
 or 4 per cent. Investors who hold  the market port-
 folio expect to earn  10 per cent, which  is 4 per
 cent greater than they could earn on a short-term
 market instrument for certain. In  order  to satisfy
 Equation (13), the expected return on securities or
 portfolios with different levels of risk must be:
 Expected Return for Different Levels of Portfolio Beta
Beta
0.0
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
Expected Return
6%
8%
10%
12%
14%
  The predictions of the model are inherently sen-
sible. For safe  investments  (/3  = 0), the model
predicts  that investors  would  expect  to  earn  the
risk-free  rate of interest. For a risky investment (/3
 > 0) investors would expect a rate of return pro-
 portional  to  the  market sensitivity (/3) of the in-
 vestment.  Thus,  stocks  with  lower  than average
 market sensitivities (such as  most utilities)  would
 offer  expected  returns  less  than  the  expected
 market return. Stocks with above average values oi
 beta (such as most airline  securities) would offei
 expected returns  in excess of the market.
   In our development of CAPM we have made a
 number of assumptions  that  are  required  if  the
 model  is  to  be established on  a rigorous basis.
 These assumptions involve investor  behavior and
 conditions in the  capital  markets. The following is
 a  set of  assumptions that  will  allow  a  simple
 derivation of the  model.
 (a) The  market  is  composed of risk-averse investors
    who measure risk in terms of standard deviation of
    portfolio  return. This assumption provides a basis
    for the use of beta-type risk measures.
 (b) All  investors have a common time horizon for in-
    vestment  decision  making  (e.g., one  month, one
    year, etc.). This assumption allows us to measure in-
    vestor  expectations  over  some common interval,
    thus making comparisons meaningful.
 (c) All  investors are assumed to have the same  ex-
    pectations  about future security returns  and  risks.
    Without this assumption, the analysis would become
    much more complicated.
 (d) Capital markets are perfect in  the  sense that all
    assets are completely divisible, there are no trans-
    actions costs or differential taxes, and borrowing
    and lending rates are equal  to each other and  the
    same for all investors.  Without these  conditions,
    frictional  barriers would exist to the equilibrium
    conditions on which  the model is based.
   While these assumptions are sufficient  to derive
 the model, it is not clear that  all  are necessary  in
 their current  form. It may well be that  several of
 the  assumptions   can be  substantially  relaxed
 without major change in  the form of the model. A
 good deal  of research  is currently being conducted
 toward this end.
   While the CAPM is indeed simple and elegant,
 these qualities do  not  in themselves guarantee that
 it  will be useful in explaining observed risk-return
 patterns. In Section 8 we will review the empirical
 literature on attempts  to verify the model.

           7.  Measurement of Security
           and  Portfolio Beta Values
The basic data for estimating betas are past rates of
return earned over a series  of relatively short in-
tervals— usually  days, weeks,  or  months.  For
example, in Tables 3 and  4 we present calculations
                                              3-32

-------
TABLE 3: REGRESSION STATISTICS FOR 30 RANDOMLY SELECTED SECURITIES*
January

SECURITY
1 City Investing Co.
2 Foster Wheeler
3 Pennsylvania Dixie
4 National Gypsum Co.
5 Radio Corp. Of America
6 Fox Film Corp.
7 Intercontinental Rubber
8 National Department
9 Phillips Jones Corp.
10 Chrysler Corp.
11 American Hide & Leather
12 Adams Express
13 Caterpillar Tractor
14 Continental Steel Co.
15 Marland Oil Co.
16 Air Reduction Co.
17 National Aviation
18 NA Tomas Co.
19 NYSE Index
20 American Ship Building
21 James Talcott
22 Jewel Tea Co. Inc.
23 International Carrier
24 Keystone Steel & Wire
25 Swift & Co.
26 Southern California
27 Bayuk Cigars
28 First National Store
29 National Linen Service
30 American Snuff
31 Homestake Mining Co.
32 Commercial Paper
.. .Mean Sec. Values
...Standard Deviations
d)
NOBS
306.00
306.00
306.00
306.00
306.00
306.00
306.00
306.00
306.00
306.00
306.00
306.00
306.00
306.00
306.00
306.00
306.00
306.00
306.00
306.00
306.00
306.00
306.00
306.00
306.00
306.00
306.00
306.00
306;00
306.00
306.00
306.00
306.00
0.0
(2)
ALPH
0.30"
-0.12
-0.20
-0.18
0.02
-0.04
0.69
-0.05
0.36
-0.26
0.55
0.11
0.43
0.21
0.06
-0.59
0.22
0.28
0.0
0.31
0.33
0.21
0.34
0.18
-0.09
0.00
-0.04
-0.08
0.61
0.17
0.16
0.0
0.13
0.28
'Based on monthly data, regression results sorted
0)
SE.A
0.53
0.49
0.47
0.32
0.38
0.53
0.64
0.45
0.44
0.37
0.66
0.23
0.32
0.36
0.29
0.29
0.39
0.63
0.0
0.52
0.42
0.32
0.26
0.30
0.30
0.22
0.39
' 0.31
0.33
0.25
0.38
0.0
0.39
0.12
by beta
1945 - June
(4)
BETA
1.67
1.57
1.40
1.38
1.35
1.31
1.28
1.26
1.25
1.21
1.16
1.16
1.14
1.12
1.11
1.08
1.04
1.01
1.00
0.99
0.98
0.95
0.93
0.84
0.81
0.77
0.71
0.67
0.63
0.54
0.24
0.0
1.05
0.31
(column 4).
1970
(5)
SE.B
0.14
0.13
0.12
0.08
0.10
0.14
0.17
0.12
0.12
0.10
0.17
0.06
0.08
0.10
0.08
0.08
0.10
0.17
0.0
0.14
0.11
0.08
0.07
0.08
0.08
0.06
0.10
0.08
0.09
0.07
0.10
0.0
0.10
0.03


(6)
SE.R v
9.20
8.36
8.15
5.45
6.60
9.15
10.95
7.73
7.54
6.29
11.36
3.93
5.45
6.22
4.99
4.98
6.71
10.88
0.0
9.01
7.23
5.42
4.39
5.19
5.08
3.77
6.76
5.33
5.75
4.33
6.60
0.0
6.76
2.10


(7)
R**2
31.43
32.98
29.33
47.29
37.02
22.35
16.13
27.05
27.89
34.12
12.78
54.87
38.09
31.31
40.69
39.73
25.15
10.72
0.0
14.53
20.43
30.14
38.41
26.90
26.08
36.60
13.49
18.01
14.50
17.74
1.77
0.0
27.25
11.85


(8)
ARPJ
1.45
0.96
0.77
0.77
0:95
0.87
1.58
0.81
1.22
0.58
1.35
0.91
1.22
0.99
0.82
0.16
0.94
0.98
0.69
0.99
1.01
0.87
0.98
0.76
0.47
0.53
0.45
0.38
1.04
0.54
0.33
0.28
0.86
0.33


(9)
SD.R
11.09
10.20
9.67
7.49
8.30
10.36
11.94
9.04
8.86
7.73 '
12.14
5.84'
6.92
7.50
6.47
6.41
7.74 '
11.50
3.73 '
9.73
8.09
6.47
5.58
6.05
5.89
4.72
7.26
5.88
6.20
4.77
6.65
0.17
7.88
2.13


(10)
CRPJ
0.87
0.46
0.33
0.50
0.62
0.38
0.92
0.41
0.85
0.28
0.67
0.75
0.99
0.72
0.62
-0.05
0.65
0.37
0.62
0.54
0.68
0.66
0.83
0.58
0.30
0.42
0.19
0.21
0.86
0.43
0.11
0.28
0.54
0.26

based on month-by-month rates of return for the
periods January 1945 to June 1970 (security betas)
and January 1960 to December 1971 (mutual fund
betas). The returns were calculated using Equation
(la).
  It  is customary to convert the observed rates of
return to risk premiums. Section 6 showed that risk
premiums are obtained by subtracting the rates of
return  that could have been achieved by investing
in short-maturity risk-free assets, such as treasury
bills  or prime commercial paper. This removes a
source of "noise" from  the data. The noise  stems
from the fact that observed returns  may be higher
in some years simply because risk-free rates of in-
terest are higher. Thus, an observed rate of return
of eight per cent might be regarded as satisfactory
if it occurred in 1960, but as a relatively low rate
of return when interest rates were at all-time highs
  DESCRIPTION OF COLUMNS IN TABLES 3 AND 4
Column
Number  Symbol            Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NOBS
ALPHA
SE.A
BETA
SE.B
SE.R
R**2
ARPJ
SD-R
CRPJ
Number of Monthly Returns
The Estimated Alpha Value
Standard Error pf Alpha
Estimated Beta Coefficient
Standard Error of Beta
Standard Error of the Regression —
an Estimate of the Unsystematic
Risk
R! Expressed in Percentage Terms
Arithmetic Average of Monthly
Risk Premiums
Standard Deviation of Monthly Risk
Premiums
Geometric (Time-Weighted) Average
of Monthly Risk Premiums
                                          3-33

-------

TABLE 4.
REGRESSION STATISTICS FOR 49 MUTUAL FUNDS*
January 1960 - December 1971

SECURITY
1 McDonnell Fund
2 Value Line Spec. Sit.
3 Keystone S-4
4 Chase Fund of Boston
5 Equity Progress
6 Oppenheimer Fund
7 Fidelity Trend Fund
8 Fidelity Capital
9 Keystone K-2
10 Delaware Fund
11 Keystone S-3
12 Putnam Growth Fund
13 Scudder Special Fund
14 Energy Fund
15 One William Street
16 The Dreyfus Fund
17 Mass. Investors Gr. Stk.
18 Windsor Fund
19 Axe-Houghton Stock
20 S&P 500 Stock Index
21 T. Rowe Price Gr. Stk.
22 Mass. Investors Trust
23 Bullock Fund
24 Keystone S-2
25 Eaton & Howard Stock
26 The Colonial Fund
27 Fidelity Fund
28 Invest. Co. of America
29 Hamilton Funds - HDA
30 Affiliated Fund
31 Keystone S-1
32 Axe-Houghton Fund B
33 American Mutual Fund
34 Pioneer Fund
35 Chemical Fund
36 Stein R&F Balanced Fd.
37 Puritan Fund
38 Value Line Income Fd.
39 Geo. Putnam Fd. Boston
40 Anchor Income
41 Loomis-Sayles Mutual
42 Wellington Fund
43 Massachusetts Fund
44 Natlon-Wide Sec.
45 Eaton & Howard Bal. Fd.
46 American Business Shares
47 Keystone K-1
48 Keystone B-4
49 Keystone B-2
50 Keystone B-1
51 30 Day Treasury Bills
. . .Mean Sec. Values
. . .Standard Deviations
0)
NOBS
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
144.00
0.0
(2)
ALPH
0.58
0.02
0.03
0.11
-0.54
0.42
0.79
0.41
0.08
0.18
0.18
0.21
0.39
0.06
0.13
0.17
0.15
0.18
0.39
0.0
0.05
-0.02
0.09
0.04
-0.05
0.06
0.15
0.26
-0.12
0.08
0.03
0.01
0.20
0.24
0.57
0.06
0.19
0.07
0.07
-0.03
0.05
-0.12
0.04
-0.32
-0.07
0.12
0.01
0.12
0.05
-0.08
0.0
0.12
0.22
•Based on monthly data, regression results sorted
(3)
SE.A
0.82
0.40
0.28
0.33
0.41
0.24
0.29
0.24
0.22
0.19
0.19
0.19
6.28
0.18
0.22
0.14
0.16
0.16
0.30
0.0
0.14
0.14
0.19
0.12
0.13
0.19
0.11
0.20
0.23
0.10
0.10
0.20
0.20
0.16
0.25
0.10
0.15
0.17
0.10
0.13
0.10
0.13
0.11
0.15
0.12
0.09
0.11
0.13
0.10
0.10
0.0
0.19
0.12
by beta
(4)
BETA
1.50
1.48
1.43
1.42
1.26
1.23
1.23
1.20
1.17
1.15
1.14
1.13
1.12
1.10
1.06
1.04
1.03
1.03
1.02
1.00
0.98
0.97
0.96
0.96
0.95
0.95
0.95
0.95
0.93
0.90
0.88
0.86
0.85
0.84
0.83
0.79
0.78
0.78
0.77
0.74
0.74
0.72
0.72
0.67
0.62
0.53
0.53
0.30
0.16
0.07
0.0
0.93
0.30
(column 4).
(5)
SE.B
0.22
0.11
0.08
0.09
0.11
0.06
0.08
0.06
0.06
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.07
0.05
0.06
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.08
0.0
0.04
0.04
0.05
0.03
0.03
0.05
0.03
0.05
0.06
0.03
0.03
0.05
0.05
0.04
0.07
0.03
0.04
0.04
0.03
0.04
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.04
0.03
0.02
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.0
0.05
0.03

(6)
SE.R
9.76
4.78
3.38
3.94
4.85
2.89
3.52
2.81
2.63
2.32
2.32
2.25
3.33
2.18
2.66
1.69
1.96
1.95
3.62
0.0
1.72
1.72
2.32
1.45
1.52
2.27
1.31
2.40
2.73
1.22
1.21
2.44
2.38
1.88
3.03
1.21
1.79
2.01
1.18
1.60
1.22
1.54
1.26
1.78
1.46
1.10
1.32
1.51
1.16
1.21
0.0
2.32
1.42

(7)
R**2
25.18
57.62
71.77
64.78
48.89
72.16
63.39
72.17
73.90
77.62
77.50
78.19
61.93
78.39
69.33
84.40
79.65
79.87
52.96
0.0
82.08
82.07
71.10
86.12
84.75
71.24
88.08
68.79
62.55
88.55
88.18
63.68
64.35
73.85
51.50
86.05
72.89
67.96
85.75
75.24
83.96
75.60
82.16
66.45
71.62
76.96
69.59
35.82
22.03
4.43
0.0
69.25
17.50

(8)
ARPJ
1.13
0.57
0.55
0.63
-0.08
0.88
1.24
0.85
0.51
0.60
0.60
0.62
0.80
0.46
0.52
0.55
0.52
0.56
0.76
0.37
0.41
0.34
0.44
0.39
0.30
0.41
,0.50
0.61
0.22
0.41
0.35
0.32
0.51
0.55
0.88
0.35
0.48
0.36
0.35
0.24
0.32
0.14
0.30
-0.08
0.16
0.31
0.21
0.23
0.11
-0.06
0.34
0.46
0.27

(9)
SD.R
11.24
7.32
6.34
6.61
6.77
5,46
5.80
5.31
5.13
4.90
4.88
4.80
5.37
4.67
4.78
4.26
4.34
4.33
5.26
3.76
4.06
4.04
4.29
3.89
3.89
4.23
3.79
4.29
4.44
3.59
3.51
4.03
3.97
3.67
4.33
3.22
3.43
3.54
3.12
3.21
3.04
3.11 ;
2.98
3.07
2.74
2.28
2.39
1.88
1.31
1.23
0.12
4.25
1.64

(10)
CRPJ
0.67
0.30
0.35
0.41
-0.31
0.73
1.07
0.71
0.38
0.48
0.48
0.51
0.66
0.35
0.41
0.46
0.43
0.47
0.62
0.30
0.32
0.26
0.35
0.31
023
032
043
0.51
0.12
0.34
0.29
0.24
0.43
0.48
0.79
0.30
0.42
0.29
0.30
0.19
0.27 ,
0.09
0.26
-0.12
0.12
0.29
0.18 ,
0.21
0.10
-0.07
0.34
0.36
0.23

3-34

-------
in  1969.  Rates  of  return  expressed  as  risk
premiums will be denoted by small  r's.
  The market  model  of  Equation (6), when ex-
pressed in risk-premium form, is the basic equation
used to estimate beta. The market model in risk-
premium form  is given by
              r= a + /3rm+
                                           (16a)
The use of risk premiums  instead of returns as in
Equation (6) simply changes the interpretation of
alpha, leaving beta unchanged. In the return form,
the expected value of alpha as given  by the CAPM
is Rfe, column (7) the R2 in
percentage terms, columns (8)  and (9) the arith-
metic average of monthly risk  premiums  and the
standard  deviation, and column (10) the geometric
mean  risk premium. The  results  are  ranked  in
terms of  descending  values of estimated beta. The
table includes summary  results for the  NYSE
market index and  the prime  commercial paper
risk-free  rate.1 The last two rows of the table give
average values and  standard deviations  for  the
sample. The average beta, for example,  is 1.05,
slightly higher than the  average of all NYSE stocks.
  The beta value for a  portfolio can be estimated
in two ways. One method is to compute the beta of
all portfolio holdings  and weight  the results by
portfolio representation. However, this method has
the disadvantage of requiring beta calculations for
each individual portfolio asset. The second method
is to use the  same computation procedures used for
stocks, but to apply  them to the portfolio returns.
In this way  we can  obtain estimates of  portfolio
betas without explicit  consideration of the port-
folio  securities. We have used  this approach to
compute  portfolio  and  mutual fund beta values.
                                              3-35

-------
  Exhibit 9 shows  the  plot of the monthly risk
premiums on the 100-stock portfolio against the
NYSE index for the same 1945-1970 period.  As in
the  case of National Department Stores, the best-
fit  line  has been  put through the  points  using
regression analysis.  The slope of the line  ($)  is
equal tb  1.10, with a standard  error of 0.03. Note
the  substantial reduction in the standard error term
compared to the security examples. The estimated
alpha is 0.14, with a standard error of 0.10. Again,
we cannot conclude that the true alpha is different
from zero. Note that the points group much closer
to the line than in  the National Department  Store
plot. This results,  of course,  from  the  fact  that
much of the unsystematic risk causing the points to
be scattered around the regression line in Exhibit 8
has  been climated. The  reduction  is evidenced by
the  R2 measure of 0.87  (versus 0.27  for National
Department Stores).  Thus  the market explains
more than  three  times as  much  of the  return
variation of the portfolio than for the stock.
  Table 5 gives regression results -for a sample of
49  mutual funds.  The  calculations  are based  on
monthly  risk  premiums for the period  January
1960 to  December  1971. The market  is  repre-
sented by the Standard & Poor's 500 Stock Index.
Average values and standard deviations for the 49
funds in the sample are  shown in the last two rows
of the table. The average beta value for the group
is 0.93—indicating, on the average, that the funds
were  less  risky than the market  index. Note the
relatively low beta values of the balanced and bond
funds, in particular the  Keystone Bl, B2, and B4
bond funds. This result is due to the low systematic
risk of the bond portfolios.
  Up to this  point  we  have shown that  it is  a
relatively easy  matter to estimate beta values for
stocks, portfolios,  and mutual  funds. Now, if the
RE
Stock
25.90
18.52
11.15
3.77
-3.60
-10.98
-18.35
-25.73
Exhibit 8
TURNS ON NATIONAL DEPARTMENT STORES VS. NYSE INDEX (% PER MONTH)
January 1945 - Juris 1970
— * —
X-
* * **
1C
* * *
* 2 2 -
+ * * *
* * * * *
* 2 8 *
_ 28 *** * * —
* ***** **
* ** ** 3 2 ****** *
** *2 **** 28*
2 * 2 *2 8*2 28 -
* * * * 28 2 8 * *
* ** * **3M83 3 8 * * 2 *
* *«*** 2883 *288* *
* "*2 8*228828288 ******
— ******228*288*28** ** —
* * * + * 2 * *** * * 2 8**
* 2 *22 88 ** ** * 2 8 * 2
* * * * * * *
- * * * * —
* * *2 88
* * * * *
* * *
1*1 1 1 1 1 1 1
NOBS = 306
a = -0.05%
SEa= 0.45%
£-1.26
SEo=0.12
df = 7.73%
R* = 0.27
7 = 0.81%
a(r) =9.04%
g = 0.41%
-8.1140 -5.4383 -2.7625 -0.0868 2.5890 5.2647 7.9405 10.6162
MKT.
                                           3-36

-------
beta values are to be useful for investment decision
making,  they must  be predictable.  Beta  values
based  on  historical  data  should  provide  con-
siderable information about future beta values  if
past measures are to be useful. How predictable
are the betas estimated for stocks, portfolios of
stocks, and mutual  funds?  Fortunately, we  have
empirical evidence at each level.
  Robert A. Levy [13]* has conducted tests of the
short-run  predictability  (also  referred  to  as
stationarity) of beta coefficients for securities and
unmanaged portfolios of securities. Levy's results
are based on weekly returns for 500 NYSE stocks
for the period December 30, 1960 through Decem-
ber  18, 1970 (520 weeks).  Betas were developed
for each  security for ten non-overlapping 52-week
periods. To measure stationarity, Levy correlated

* References appear at end of article.
the 500 security betas from each 52-week period
(the historical betas) with the 52-week betas in the
following period (the future betas). Thus nine cor-
relation studies were performed for the ten periods.
  To compare  the  stationarity  of  security  and
portfolio betas,  Levy  constructed portfolios of 5,
10, 25, and 50  securities and repeated the same
correlation analysis for the historical portfolio
betas and future  beta values for the same portfolios
in the subsequent period. The portfolios were  con-
structed by ranking security betas in  each period
and partitioning the list into portfolios containing
5, 10,  25 and 50 securities.  Each portfolio  con-
tained  an  equal  investment in each security.
  The results of  Levy's 52-week correlation studies
are presented in  Table 5. The average values of the
correlation coefficients  from  the nine trials  were
0.486,  0.769, 0.853,  0.939,  and 0.972 for port-
folios of 1, 5, 10, 25, and 50 stocks,  respectively.
                                         Exhibit 9
       RETURNS ON 100 STOCK PORTFOLIO VERSUS NYSE INDEX (% PER MONTH)
                                January 1949 - June 1970
  Stock
13.00
9.71



6.33




2.95

-0.43


-3.82



-7.20



-10.58



* *
*
*
* * *
*
* *** *
* * * ***** *
* 28* —
** 4 *3 * **
* 32 * 3 **2* *
* * **3 223* * *
***** * 2 8 2 *
* 3 2 3233 2882 —
* 3 3828823*2
* ** 4822.8422382 2 8
**2 5tf * 38
* * **3 828 2 *
* + *2882 8 32 -
2 * 288 «2 8* *
* 32*22222 *
* * * '38 * *
28 **3 8 *
* 2882
* **28*** *
* *
* *28 **
* .*28 —
* *
* *
*
_ **
6 *
*
q
I I 1 I I I I I









NOBS = 306
3= 0. 1 4%
SEa= 0.10%
l5-1.11
SEo = 0.03
O'e 1.64%
R2' = 0.87
7 = 0.91 %
<7(r) = 4.46%
9 = 0.81%









-8.1140 -5.4383 -2.7625 -0.0868 2.5890 5.2647 7.9405 10.6162
MKT.
                                             3-37

-------
Correspondingly, the average percentages of the
variation in future betas explained by the historical
betas are 23.6, 59.1, 72.8, 88.2, and  94.5.
  The results show the beta coefficients to be very
predictable for large portfolios and progressively
less  predictable  for smaller  portfolios and in-
dividual securities. These conclusions are not af-
fected by changes in market performance. Of the
nine  correlation studies,  five  covered  forecast
periods during which the market performance was
the reverse of the preceding period  (61-62, 62-63,
65-66, 66-67, and 68-69). Notably, the betas were
approximately as predictable over these five rever-
sal  periods as over the  remaining four intervals.5
  The question of the stability of mutual fund beta
values is more complicated.  Even if, as seen above,
the betas  of large unmanaged portfolios are very
predictable, there is no a priori need for  mutual
fund  betas to  be comparatively stable. Indeed, the
betas of mutual fund portfolios may change sub-
stantially over time by design. For example, a port-
folio  manager may tend  to reduce the risk exposure
of his fund prior to an expected market decline and
raise  it  prior  to an  expected  market upswing.
However, the  range of possible values for beta will
tend  to be restricted, at least in the longer run, by
the fund's investment  objective.  Thus while one
does  not expect  the same standard of predictability
as for large unmanaged portfolios, it may  never-
theless be interesting  to examine  the extent to
which fund betas are predictable.
   Pogue and  Conway  [21] have conducted tests
for a sample of 90 mutual funds. The beta  values
                                    for  the  period  January  1969 through  May  1970
                                    were correlated  with values  from the subsequent
                                    period from June 1970 through October 1971. To.
                                    test the  sensitivity of the results to changes in the
                                    return measurement  interval, the betas for each
                                    sub-period were measured for daily, weekly, and
                                    monthly returns. The betas  were thus  based on
                                    very different numbers  of observations,  namely
                                    357, 74, and   17,   respectively.  The  resulting
                                    correlation  coefficients  were 0.915,  0.895,  and
                                    0.703 for daily, weekly, and monthly betas. Corre-
                                    spondingly, the average percentages of variation in
                                    second-period  betas explained   by  first-period
                                    values are 84, 8'1, and 49, respectively. The results
                                    support  the contention that historical betas contain
                                    useful information about future values.  However,
                                    the  degree of predictability depends on the extent
                                    to which measurement errors  have been eliminated
                                    from beta estimates. In the Pogue-Conway study,
                                    the  shift from monthly to daily returns reduced the
                                    average  standard error of the  estimated beta values
                                    from 0.11 to 0.03, a 75 per  cent reduction.  The
                                    more accurate daily estimates resulted  in a much
                                    higher degree of beta predictability, the correlation
                                    between sub-period betas increasing from 0.703 to
                                    0.915.6
                                      Exhibit 10 shows a Pogue-Conway plot of the
                                    first-period  versus second-period  betas  based on
                                    daily returns. The figure  illustrates the high degree
                                    of correlation  between  first- and second-period
                                    betas.
                                      In summary, we can conclude that estimated in-
                                    dividual security betas are not highly  predictable.
TABLE 5, CORRELATION OF 52-WEEK BETA FORECASTS WITH  MEASURED VALUES
                   FOR PORTFOLIOS OF N SECURITIES
1962-1970
Forecast for
52 Weeks
Ended
12/28/62
12/27/63
12/25/64
12/24/65
12/23/66
12/22/67
12/20/68
12/19/69
12/18/70
Quadratic
Mean
Source: Robert A. Levy


1
.385
.492 -
.430
.451
.548
.474
.455
.556
.551

.486
[13], Table 2, p.
Product

5
.711
.806
.715
.730
.803
. .759
.732
.844
.804

.769
57.
Moment Correlations: N=

10
.803
.866
.825
.809
.869
.830
.857
.922
.888

.853


25
.933
.931
.945
.936
.952
.900
.945
.965
.943

.939


50
.988
.963
.970
'.977
.974
.940
.977
.973
.985

.972

                                3-38

-------
EXHIBIT 10
INTERPERIOD BETA COMPARISON:
DAILY DATA FOR 90 MUTUAL FUNDS
Second
Period
(June '70
to 1-50
Oct. '71)
1.00
0.50



"I
•

•
$
*v
~.
•
*-
•\°
•

.'
•



0 0.50 1.00 1.50 2.00
Beta - - First Period (Jan '69 to May '70)
Source: Pogue and Conway [21]
                                                  not necessarily zero for any single stock or single
                                                  period of time. After the fact, we would expect to
                                                  observe
Levy's tests indicated that  an average of 24  per
cent of the variation in second-period betas is ex-
plained by historical values. The betas of his port-
folios, on the other hand, were much more predict-
able,  the  degree  of  predictability increasing  with
portfolio diversification. The  results of the Pogue
and  Conway  study  and  others show that fund
betas, not unexpectedly, are not as stable as those
for unmanaged portfolios. Nonetheless, two-thirds
to three-quarters  of the variation in fund betas can
be explained by historical values.
  The reader should remember that a significant
portion of the measured changes in estimated beta
values may not  be  due  to changes  in  the  true
values, but rather to measurement errors. This ob-
servation  is particularly applicable to individual
security betas where  the standard errors tend to be
large.
          8. Tests of The Capital Asset
                Pricing Model *
The major difficulty in testing the CAPM is that
the  model  is  stated  in  terms of  investors'  ex-
pectations and not in terms of realized returns. The
fact that expectations are not always realized in-
troduces an  error term, which from  a statistical
point of view should be zero  on the average, but
The material in this section was  also prepared as an ap-
 pendix to testimony to  be delivered before the Federal
 Communications Commission by S.C. Myers and GA.
 Pogue.
                                                                    /3;(Rm-R/)
                                          (17a)
                                                  where Ry, Rm, and R/ are the realized returns on
                                                  stock j, the market index,  and the riskless asset;
                                                  and ej is the residual term.
                                                     If we observe the realized returns over a series of
                                                  periods, the average security return would be given
                                                  by
                                                          Ry= Rf
                                          .(lib)
where  R;,  RM, and RF are  the average realized
returns on  the stock, the market and the risk-free
rate. If the CAPM  is correct, the average residual
term, e,-, should approach  zero as  the number of
periods used  to compute the average  becomes
large. To  test this  hypothesis, we can regress the
average returns, R/, for a series of stocks (j== 1, .. .,
N) on the stocks' estimated beta values, $/> during
the period  studied.  The equation of the fitted line
is given by

            R/= yo + y£j + pj,            (iga)

where  ya and  yl are the intercept and slope of the
line, and  /u,y is the  deviation of stock j from the
line. By comparing Equations (17b) and (18a), we
infer that  if  the CAPM  hypothesis is valid, ^
should equal  e, and hence should  be smalL Fur-
thermore, .it should be uncorrelated with /3,, and
hence  we  can _also infer that ya  and  y^ should
equal RF and RM  - RF respectively.
  The hypothesis is illustrated in Exhibit 11. Each
plotted point represents one  stock's realized return
versus the stock's  beta. The vertical distances of
the  points from the CAPM  theoretical line (also
called the "market line")   represent  the  mean
residual  returns, e/. Assuming the CAPM  to be
correct, the e/ should be uncorrelated with the /3,
and thus the regression  equation  fitted to these
points should  be 0) lineaj, (2) upward sloping with
slope  equal to  RM -  RF,  and:(3) should pass
through the vertical axis at  the risk-free rate.
   Expressed in risk-premium form, the equation of
the  fitted line is

            iy= y» + y&j + /*/.            (isb)

where 7/ is the average  realized risk premium for
stock / Comparing Equation (18b) to  the CAPM
                                              3-39

-------
in risk-premium  form  [Equation (15)],  the  pre-
dicted values for y0 and y_i  are_0 and rm.  the
mean market risk premium (RM - Rf). Thus shift-
ing to risk premiums changes the predicted value
only for y0,  but  not for y,.

Other Measures  of Risk
  The hypothesis just described is only true if beta
is a complete measure of a stock's risk. Various
alternative  risk  measures  have  been  proposed,
however. The most common alternative hypothesis
states that expected return is related to the stand-
ard deviation of  return—that is, to  a stock's total
risk, which includes both systematic and unsystem-
atic components.
  Which  is more important in explaining average
observed returns on securities, systematic or unsys-
tematic risk? The way  to find  out is to fit an ex-
panded equation to the data:
                    A       A
        Ry =  7o + 7l/3y  + ya(SEy) + /Ay .        (19)

Here /3y is a measure of systematic risk and SEy a
measure of unsystematic risk.7 Of  course, if the
CAPM is exactly true,  then y2  will  be zero—that
is,  SEy will  contribute  nothing to the explanation
of observed security returns.

Tests of the Capital Asset Pricing Model
  If the CAPM is right, empirical tests would show
the following:
1. On the average, and over long  periods of time, the
   securities with high systematic risk should  have high
   rates of return.
2. On the  average, there should be a linear relationship
   between systematic risk and return.
3. The slope of the relationship (y,) should be equal to
   the mean market risk  premium (RM - RF) during
   the period  used.
4. The constant term (y0) should be equal to the mean
   risk-free rate (R/r).
5. Unsystematic risk, as measured  by SEy, should play
   no significant  role in  explaining  differences  in
   security returns.
These predictions have  been  tested  in several
recent statistical  studies.  We will review some of
the more  important ones. Readers wishing to skip
the details may proceed to the summary at the end
of  this  section.  We  will  begin by  summarizing
results from studies based on individual securities,
and then we will turn to portfolio results.

Results of Tests  Based on Securities
The Jacob Study-."The Jacob study [9] deals with
the  593  New York  Stock Exchange stocks  for
                        Exhibit 11
           RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN AVERAGE
           RETURN (ftp AND SECURITY RISK
      Average
      Security
      Return
                                  Theoretical Line
                               X        X  _        X

                                   X     "   X  x
                         XX          .

                              y      X      ^^
                         X                 Fitted Line
                      X               X
                       X '     XX      XX
                xx    x x

                     X
                  X
                    |        I       I        I
                                                 -A
                   0.5     1.0     1.5      2.0       s
                                                 Risk
     which there is  complete data from  1946 to 1965.
     Regression analyses were performed for the 1946-
     55 and  1956-65  periods, using both monthly and
     annual security returns.  The relationship of mean
     security returns and beta values is shown in Table
     6. The  last  two columns  of  the  table give the
     theoretical values for the coefficients, as predicted
     by the CAPM.
       The results show a significant positive relation-
     ship between realized return and risk during each
     of the 10-year periods.  For example, in 1956-65
     there was  a 6.7  per  cent  per  year increase in
     average return for  a  one-unit increase in  beta.
     Although the relationships shown in Table 6 are all
     positive, they are weaker than those predicted by
     the CAPM.  In each period yl  is less  and  y0  is
     greater than  the  theoretical values.
     The  rviilier-Scholes Study.  The   Miller-Scholes
     research  [19]  deals with annual returns for 631
     stocks during the 1954-63  period. The results of
     three of their tests  are reported in Table  7.  The
     tests are (1) mean  return  versus beta, (2) mean
     return versus unsystematic  ri$!$ (SEr)2? and (3)
     mean return versus both beta arid unsystematic
     risk.
3-40

-------
  The results for the first test  show a significant   pie,  a  substantial positive  correlation exists lie-
positive  relationship  between  mean  return and   tween  beta and  ($£/. Thus  unsystematic  risk
beta. A one-unit increase in beta is associated with
a 7.1  per cent increase in mean return.
  The results for the second test do not agree with
the CAPM's predictions. That is, high unsystematic
risk is apparently associated with  higher  realized
returns. However,  Miller  and Scholes show that
this correlation may be largely spurious (i.e., it may
be due to statistical sampling problems). For exam-
will  appear to be significant  in tests  from which
beta has  been omitted, even though  it may be
unimportant to the pricing of securities. This sort
of statistical correlation need not imply a causal
link  between the variables.
  Test number (3) includes both beta and (SEy)2 in
the  regression equation.  Both  are  found to be
significantly positively related to mean return. The
TABLE 6. RESULTS OF JACOB'S STUDY
f/ = TO + yfij + M/
Tests Based on 593 Securities
Period Return
Interval
46-55 Monthly
Yearly
56-65 Monthly
Yearly
(a) Coefficient units are: monthly
(b) Standard error.
Source: Jacob [9], Table 3, pp.
Regression Results'8' Theoretical Values
To
0.80
8.9
0.70
6.7
data,

7, R* 7o=0 r, = RM-RF
0.30 0.02 0 1.10
(0.07)(b)
5.10 0.14 0 14.4
(0.53)
0.30 0.03 0 0.8
(0.06)
6.7 0.21 0 10.8
(0.53)
percent per month; annual data, percent per year.

827-828.





TABLE 7



Regression
. RESULTS OF THE MILLER AND SCHOLES STUDY
R/ = y0 + y^i + yi(SEy)2 + fi/
Annual Rates of Return 1954-1963
Tests Based on 631 Securities
Results'8' Theoretical Values





7» y, y. R2 yo y, y,
12.2
( 0.7)(b)
16.3
( 0.4)
12.7
( 0.6)
7.1
(0.6)


4.2
(0.6)
0.19 2.8 8.5

39.3 0.28 2.8 8.5
( 2.5)
31.0 0.33 2.8 8.5
( 2.6)
0

0

0

(a) Units of Coefficients: per cent per year.
(b) Standard error.
Source: Miller and

Scholes [19],

Table 1B, p. 53.


                                              3-41

-------
inclusion  of (SE";)2 has  somewhat  weakened the
relationship of return and beta, however. A one-
unit increase in beta is now associated with only a
4.2 per cent increase in  mean return.
  The interpretation of these results is again com-
plicated by the strong positive correlation between
beta and (S§/, and by other sampling problems.8
A significant  portion of the correlation between
mean return and  (SIi,)2  may  well  be a spurious
result. In any case, the results do show that stocks
with high  systematic risk tend  to have  higher rates
of return.

Results for Tests  Based on Portfolio  Returns

  Tests based directly on securities clearly  show
the significant positive correlation between return
and systematic risk. Such tests, however, are not
the most efficient method of obtaining  estimates of
the magnitude of the risk-return tradeoff. The tests
are inef  ient for two reasons.
  The first  problem is well known to  economists.
It is  called  "errors in variables bias" and results
from the fact that beta, the independent variable in
the  test,  is typically measured with  some  error.
These errors are random in their effect—that is,
some stocks' betas are overestimated and some are
underestimated. Nevertheless,  when  these  esti-
mated beta values  are used in the test, the measure-
ment errors tend to attenuate the relationship  be-
tween mean return and  risk.
  By carefully grouping  the  securities into port-
folios, much of this measurement error problem
can be eliminated. The errors in individual stocks'
betas cancel out so  that the portfolio beta can be
measured with much greater precision. This in turn
means that tests based on portfolio returns will be
more efficient than tests based on security returns.
  The second problem relates to the obscuring ef-
fect of residual variation. Realized security returns
have  a  large random component, which typically
accounts for about 70 per cent of the variation of
return.  (This is the diversifiable  or unsystematic
risk of the stock.) By grouping securities into port-
folios, we can eliminate much of this "noise"  and
thereby get a much clearer view of the relationship
between return and  systematic risk.
  It should be noted that grouping does not distort
the underlying risk-return relationship.  The rela-
tionship that  exists for  individual  securities is
exactly the same for portfolios of securities.
Friend and Blume Studies. Professors Friend  and
Blume [3,8] have conducted two interrelated risk-
return studies. The first examines the relationship
between long-run rates of return and various  risk
measures. The second is a direct test of the CAPM
  In  the first study [8],  Friend and  Blume con-
structed portfolios of NYSE common stocks at th<
beginning of three  different holding  periods. The
periods began at the ends of 1929, 1948, and 1956
All stocks for which monthly rate-of-return data
TABLE 8. RESULTS OF FRIEMD-BIUME STUDY
Returns from a yearly revision policy for
stocks classified by beta for various periods.
Holding Period

Port-
folio
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Monthly
Source:


Beta
0.19
0.49
0.67
0.81
0.92
1.02
1.15
1.29
1.49
2.02
1929-1969
Mean
Return
%
0.79
1.00
1.10
1.28
1.26
1.34
1.42
1.53
1.55
1.59
1948-1969

Beta
0.45
0.64
0.76
0.85
0.94
1.03
1.12
1.23
1.36
1.67
Mean
Return
%
0.99
1.01
1.25
1.30
1.35
1.37
1.32
1.33
1.39
1.36
1956-1969

Beta
0.28
0.51
0.66
0.80
0.91
1.03
1.16
1.30
1.48
1.92
i
Mean
Return
%
0.95
0.98
1.12
1.18
1.17
1.14
1.10
1.18
1,15
1.10
arithmetic mean returns
Friend and
Blume [8], Table 4, p. 10.




                                              3-42

-------
could be obtained for at least four years preceding
the test period were divided into 10 portfolios. The
securities were assigned on the basis of their betas
during the preceding four years—the 10 per cent
of securities with the lowest betas to the first port-
folio, the group with the next lowest  betas to the
second portfolio, and so  on.
   After the start of the test periods, the securities
were  reassigned  annually.  That  is, each  stock's
estimated beta was recomputed at the end of each
successive year, the stocks were ranked again on
the basis of their betas,  and new  portfolios  were
formed.  This procedure  kept the  portfolio betas
reasonably stable over time.
   The  performance of  these portfolios is sum-
marized in Table 8. The table gives the arithmetic
mean monthly returns and average beta values for
each of the 10 portfolios and for each test period.
   For the 1929-69 period, the results indicate  a
strong  positive association  between  return and
beta.  For the  1948-69 period, while higher beta
portfolios had higher returns than portfolios with
lower  betas, there  was little  difference in return
among portfolios with betas greater than 1.0. The
1956-69 period results do not show a clear  rela-
tionship between beta and return. On the basis of
these and other  tests, the  authors conclude that
NYSE stocks with above average risk have higher
returns than those with below average risk, but that
there is  little payoff for  assuming additional risk
within the  group of stocks  with  above  average
betas.
   In  their second  study [3], Blume and  Friend
used monthly portfolio returns during  the 1955-68
period to test the CAPM. Their tests  involved fit-
ting the coefficients of Equation (18a) for three
                           sequential periods:  1955-59, l%0-&4. and  l%5-
                           68.  The  authors  also  added  u  factor  to  the
                           regression equation to test for the linearity  of the
                           risk-return relationship."
                             The values obtained for  y0 and y, are  not  in
                           line with the Capital Asset Pricing Model's predic-
                           tions, however. In the first two periods, ?„  is sub-
                           stantially  larger than the  theoretical value.  In the
                           third period, the reverse  situation  exists, with y0
                           substantially less than predicted. These results im-
                           ply that ylt the slope of the fitted line, is less than
                           predicted  in the first two periods and greater in the
                           third.10 Friend and  Blume conclude that "the com-
                           parisons as a whole suggest that a linear model is a
                           tenable  approximation of the  empirical relation-
                           ship  between return and risk for NYSE stocks over
                           the three  periods covered.""
                           Black, Jensen, and Scholes.  This study  [1]  is a
                           careful attempt to reduce measurement errors that
                           would bias  the regression results.  For  each year
                           from 1931 to 1965, the authors grouped all NYSE
                           stocks into 10 portfolios. The  number of securities
                           in each portfolio increased over the 35-year period
                           from a low of 58 securities per portfolio in 1931  to
                           a high of 110 in 1965.
                              Month-by-month returns  for the portfolios were
                           computed from January 1931  to December 1965.
                           Average portfolio returns and  portfolio betas were
                           computed for the 35-year period  and for a variety
                           of sub-periods. The results for the complete period
                           are shown in Table 9. The  average monthly port-
                           folio returns and beta values for  the 10 portfolios
                           are plotted in Exhibit  12. The results indicate that
                           over the complete  3 5-year  period, average return
                           increased  by approximately  1.08 per  cent  per
                           month (13 per cent per year) for a  one-unit  in-
                          TABLE 9. RESULTS OF BLACK-JENSEN-SCHOLES STUDY
                                             1931-1965
                                     Tests Based on 10 Portfolios
                                  (Averaging 75 Stocks per Portfolio)
                 Regression Results'3'
                                        Theoretical Values
                                                         70 =
                                                                             -y, = RM-RF
         0.519
        (0.05)
             (b)
 1.08
(0.05)
                                       0.90
                                                          0.16
                                                                                 1.42
   (a) Units of Coefficients: per cent per month.
   (b) Standard error.
   Source: Black, Jensen, and Scholes [1], Table 4, p. 98, and Figure 7, p. 104.
                                             3-43

-------
crease in beta. This is about three-quarters of the
amount predicted by  the  CAPM. As  Exhibit  12
shows, there appears to be little reason to question
the linearity of the relationship over the 35-year
period.
  Black, Jensen, and Scholes also estimated the
risk-return tradeoff for a number of subperiods.12
The slopes of the regression  lines tend  in most
periods to understate the theoretical values, but are
generally of the correct sign. Also, the subperiod
relationships appear to be linear.
  This paper  provides  substantial support  for the
hypothesis that realized returns are a linear func-
tion of systematic risk  values.  Moreover, it shows
that the relationship is significantly  positive over
long periods of time.
Fama  and  MacBeth. Fama and MacBeth [6] have
extended the Black-Jensen-Scholes tests to include
two additional factors. The first is an average of
the /?/ for  all individual securities in portfolio p,
designated /§P2. The second is a similar average of
the residual standard deviations (Sfiy) for all stocks
in portfolio p, designated S£P. The first term tests
for nonlinearities  in the risk-return relationship,
the second  for the  impact of residual variation.
  The equation of the fitted  line for the Fama-
MacBeth study is  given by

    RP  = y» + yJP + yjip* + y3S§p +  Mp ,   (20)

where, according to the CAPM, we should expect
y2  and ya to have zero values.
  The results  of the Fama-MacBeth tests show that
while estimated  values of y2 and ya are not equal
to zero for each interval examined,  their average
values  tend to  be  insignificantly different  from
zero. Fama and MacBeth also confirm the Black-
Jensen-Scholes result that the realized values of y0
are not equal to Ry, as predicted by the CAPM.

Summary of Test Results
  We  will  briefly  summarize the major results of
the empirical  tests.
1. The evidence shows a significant positive relationship
   between  realized returns  and  systematic risk.
   However, the slope of the relationship (yj is  usually
   less  than predicted by the CAPM.
2. The relationship between risk and return appears to
   be linear. The studies give no evidence of significant
   curvature in the risk-return relationship.
3. Tests that attempt to discriminate between the effects
  of systematic and unsystematic risk do not yield
  definitive  results.  Both kinds  of risk appear to be
  positively related to security returns. However, there
                      Exhibit 12
            RESULTS OF BLACK, JENSEN
                AND SCHOLES STUDY
                      1931 - 1965
       .11
       .10
       .08
    03
    Z
    DC

    jjj  .06
    in
    05
    <
    GC
    III
       .04
       .02
       .00
      -.02
INTERCEPT = 0.00519
 STD. ERR. = 0.00053
              SLOPE
               STD. ERR.
          '0.01081
          •• 0.00050
                                      X
                              • X X
                  -x
                    X  X'
         0.0      0.5       1.0       1.5

                    SYSTEMATIC RISK
                                            2.0
         Average monthly returns versus systematic
         risk for the 35-year period 1931-1965 for
         ten portfolios and the market portfolio.

         Source: Black, Jensen, and Scholes [1],
         Figure 7, p. 104.
   is substantial support for the proposition that the re-
   lationship between return and unsystematic risk  is at
   least  partly  spurious—that  is,  it  partly  reflects
   statistical problems rather than the true  nature of
   capital markets.
  Obviously,  we cannot claim that  the  CAPM is
absolutely  right. On the other hand, the empirical
tests do support the view that beta is a useful  risk
measure and that high beta stocks tend to be priced
so as to yield  correspondingly high rates of return.

  9. Measurement of Investment Performance
The basic concept underlying investment  perform-
ance measurement follows directly from  the risk-
return  theory.  The return on managed portfolios,
such as mutual funds, can be judged relative to the
                                              3-44

-------
returns  on  unmanaged  portfolios at  the  same
degree of investment risk. If the return exceeds the
standard, the portfolio manager has performed in a
superior way, and vice versa. Given this, it remains
to select a set  of "benchmark" portfolios against
which the performance of managed portfolios can
be evaluated.

Performance Measures Developed
from the Capital Asset Pricing Model
  The CAPM provides a convenient and familiar
standard for performance measurement; the bench-
mark portfolios are  simply combinations  of  the
riskless  asset and the market  index. The  return
standard for a mutual fund, for example, with beta
equal to PF, is equal to the risk-free rate (RF) plus
ftp times^he average realized risk premium on the
market  (RM  - RF)._Thus the  return on the per-
formance standard (R5) is given by
Rs =
                     /3P(RM-RF),
(21)
where RM  and  Rf  are  the arithmetic  average
returns  on  the  market index  and riskless asset
during the  evaluation period. The performance
measure, designated ap, is equal to the difference
in average returns between the fund and its stan-
dard; that is,
                a =  p-
                                           (22)
where  RF is the arithmetic average return on the
fund. Under the CAPM assumption, the expected
values of RP and R5 are the same; therefore the ex-
pected value for the performance measure  &p is
zero. Managed portfolios with positive estimated
values for ap have thus outperformed the standard,
and  vice versa. Estimated values of alpha (&p) are
determined by  regressing  the  portfolio  risk
premiums  on  the  corresponding  market  risk
premiums.
  The interpretation of the estimated alpha must
take into  consideration  possible  statistical
measurement errors.  As we discussed in  Section 7,
the standard error of alpha (SEJ is an  indication
of the extent of the possible  measurement error.
The  larger the  standard error, the less certain we
can  be that   measured   alpha  is a  close   ap-
proximation of the true value.13
  A  measure  of  the   degree  of statistical
significance of  the estimated alpha value is given
by the ratio of  the estimated alpha to its standard
error. The  ratio, designated as ta,  is  given by
               ta = ap I SE«
                                (23)
                                                         Exhibit  13
                                               RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN THE
                                             JENSEN AND TREYNOR MEASURES
                                              OF INVESTMENT PERFORMANCE
                                        Average
                                        Portfolio  R"
                                        Return
                                                                       A1
                                                     Lines of
                                                     Constant
                                                     Tl Values^
                                                                               ~The Market Line
                                                          0.5
                                                                   1.0
                                                                            1.5
                                                                                 Risk
                                          Symbols: R;  = Return on Market Index
                                                  Hp  = Risk-free Rate of Interest
                                                  A,B  = Managed Portfolios
                                                  A'   = Portfolro A Levered to Same Beta as
                                                       Portfolio B
                                       The statistic ta gives  a  measure of the  extent to
                                       which the true value of alpha can be considered to
                                       be different from zero. If the absolute ^value of trt is
                                       large, then we have more confidence that the true
                                       value of alpha is different from zero.  Absolute
                                       values of ta in excess of 2.0 indicate a probability
                                       of less than about 2.5 per cent that the true value
                                       of alpha is zero.
                                         These  methods  of performance  measurement
                                       were originally devised by Michael Jensen [10,11 ]
                                       and have been widely used  in many studies of in-
                                       vestment performance, including that of the recent
                                       SEC Institutional Investor Study '[21 ].
                                         A performance measure  closely  related to the
                                       Jensen alpha  measure was  developed  by Jack  L.
                                       Treynor [24].  The Treynor performance measure
                                       (designated  TI)14 is given by
                                                       TI = a/j3,.;
                                                 (24)
      The difference between the a and TI performance
      measures is simply that the fund  alpha value has
                                            3-45

-------
been  divided  by its  estimated  beta. The effect,
however,  is  significant, eliminating  a  so-called
"leverage  bias"  from the Jensen alpha measures.
This is illustrated in Exhibit 13.
  Funds A and B  in Exhibit  13 have the same
alpha values. (The alphas are equal to the vertical
distance on the diagram between the funds and the
market  line.) By combining portfolio B with the
riskless  rate (that is, by borrowing or lending at
Rf), any return-risk combination along line Y can
be obtained-. But such points are clearly dominated
by  combinations  along line  X—attainable  by
borrowing  or lending combined with fund A.  As
Exhibit  13 shows,  the alpha for fund  A,  when
levered  to the same  beta  as fund B (Point A'),
dominates  the latter's alpha value.
  The Treynor measure eliminates this leverage ef-
fect. All funds which lie along a line (such as X or
Y) have the same Tl value; therefore borrowing or
lending  combined with any fund outcome will  not
increase   (or  decrease) its performance measure.
The Treynor measure thus permits direct perform-
ance comparisons among funds with differing beta
values.

Problems with the Market Line Standard
  The tests of the CAPM summarized in Section 8
indicate  that  the  average  returns  over time  on
securities  and portfolios tend to  deviate from the
predictions of  the  model.  Though the  observed
risk-return relationships seem to be linear, they are
generally flatter than predicted  by the CAPM, im-
plying that the tradeoff of risk for return is  less
than predicted.
  This evidence raises some question as to whether
the CAPM market  line provides the  best bench-
mark for  performance measurement and suggests
instead  that other benchmark  portfolios  may  be
more appropriate. For example, under certain con-
ditions, the "empirical" risk-return lines developed
by  Black,  Jensen,  and  Scholes [1] and  others
would seem to be a reasonable alternative to the
CAPM  market line  standard. This might .be the
case if the portfolio for which performance is being
measured were restricted to exactly the same set of
investment options  used to create the empirical
standard, that is, if the portfolio were fully invested
in common stock and could not use leverage to in-
crease its beta value. For such a portfolio it would
seem appropriate to  measure performance relative
to the empirical  line, as opposed to the market
line.
  A comparison of these standards is illustrated in
                   Exhibit 14
      MEASUREMENT OF INVESTMENT
    PERFORMANCE: MARKET LINE VERSUS
           EMPIRICAL STANDARD
 Average
 Portfolio
 Return
          Empirical Line
              Market Line
                 0.5
                           1.0
                                    1.5
                                           Risk
         Symbols:  R.. = Return on Market Index
                 RZ = Return on Zero Beta Portfolio
                 R_ = Risk-Free Rate of Interest
                 X  = Investment Portfolios
                 O  = Market Index
Exhibit 14. The market line performance measure
(designated as a t in Exhibit 14) is equal to the ver-
tical distance from the portfolio to the market line.
The empirical line measure (designated a2) is the
vertical distance from the portfolio to the empirical
line. Since ideally all the stocks used to develop the
empirical line are  contained  in the market  index,
the empirical  line, like the market line, would be
expected to  have a return equal to market return,
RM, for beta  equal to 1.0. The intercepts on the
return  axis, however, are typically  different for the
two lines. The market line intercept, by definition,
is equal to the average risk-free rate. The empirical
line  intersects the  return axis at a point different
from- RF,  and typically  above it. This intercept
equals the average_return on a portfolio with "zero
beta",  designated Rz. The existence of a long-run
average return on the zero  beta portfolio that dif-
fers from the riskless rate is a clear violation of the
predictions of the CAPM. As of this time, there is
no clear theoretical understanding of the reason for
this difference.
  To summarize,  empirically based  performance
                                            3-46

-------
standards  could,  under certain conditions, provide
alternatives to  those  of the CAPM  market  line
standard.  However, the design of appropriate em-
pirical standards requires further research. In  the
interim,  the familiar  market line benchmarks can
provide  useful information regarding performance,
although the information should not be regarded as
being very precise.15  •
                        Footnotes
     From this point on, systematic risk will be referred to simply
     as "risk." Total risk will be referred to as "total risk."
     We use the term portfolio in a general sense, including the
     case where the investor holds only one security. Since port-
     folio return and (systematic)  risk  are  simply  weighted
     averages of security values, risk-return relationships which
     hold for securities must also be true for portfolios, and vice
     versa.
     The sample was picked to give the broadest possible range
     of security beta  values. This was accomplished by ranking
     all NYSE  securities with complete data from 1945-70 by
     their estimated  beta values during this period. We then
     selected  every 25th stock from the ordered list. The data
     was obtained from the University of Chicago CRSP (Center
     for Research in  Security  Prices) tape.
     The commercial  paper results in Table 3 are rates of return,
     not risk premiums. The risk premiums would equal zero by
     definition.
     Correlation studies of this type tend to produce a con-
     servative  picture  of  the  degree  of  beta  coefficient
     stationarity. This results from the fact that it is not  possible
     to correlate the  true beta values but only estimates which
     contain  varying degrees  of  measurement  error.
     Measurement error would reduce the correlation coefficient
     even though the underlying beta values  were unchanged
     from period to period.
     These results are consistent with those found by N. Mains in
     a later study [16]. Mains' correlated adjacent calendar-year
     betas for a sample of 99 funds for the period 1960  through
     1 97 1 . The betas  were based on weekly returns.  The average
     correlation  coefficient  for  1 1  tests was  0.788, with in-
     dividual  values ranging from a low of 0.614 to a  high of
     0.871.
     SE/ is an estimate of the standard error of the residual term
     in Equation (17a). Thus it is the estimated value for cr(ey),
     the  unsystematic risk  term defined in Equation (8).  See
     column (6) of  Tables 3 and  4  for typical  values for
     securities and  mutual funds.
     For example, skewness in the distributions of stock returns
     can lead to spurious correlations between mean return  and
     SE,. See  Miller and Scholes [19], pp. 66-71.
     Their expanded  test equation is
 5.
10.

11.
12.
1 3.
    where, according to the CAPM, the expected value of y, is
    zero.
    Table 1 , p. 25, of Blume and Friend [3] presents period-by-
    period regression results.
    Blume and Friend  [3], p. 26.
    Figure 6 of Black, Jensen, and Scholes [1], pp. 101-103,
    shows average monthly returns versus systematic risk for 17
    nonoverlapping 2-year periods from  1932 to  1965.
    See columns 2  and 3 of Table 4 for typical mutual fund Si
    and SEa  values.
14.  Treynor's work preceded that of Jensen. In a discussion of
    Jensen's  performance measure [26], Treynor  showed that
    his measure (as originally presented in [25]) was equivalent
    to
                       TI = Rf - ot//3.
    Since Rf is a constant, the TI index for ranking purposes is
    equivalent to that given in Equation (24).
15.  There are a number of excellent references for further study
    of  portfolio theory. Among these  we  would  recommend
    books by Richard A. Brealey [4], Jack Clark  Frances [7],
    and William F. Sharpe [24]. For a more technical survey of
    the theoretical and empirical literature, see Jensen  [12].
                      References
[1 ]   Black, Fischer, Jensen, Michael C, and Scholes, Myron S.
      "The  Capital  Asset  Pricing  Model:  Some  Empirical
      Tests.'  Published in Studies in the  Theory oj Capital
      Markets, edited by Michael Jensen. (New York: Pracger.
      1972), pp. 79-121.
[2]   Blume, Marshall E.  "Portfolio Theory: A Step Toward Its
      Practical  Application." Journal of  Business.  Vol. 43
      (April 1970),  pp. 152-173.
[3]   Blume, Marshall E., and Friend. Irwin.  "A New Look at
      the  Capital Asset Pricing Model." Journal of Finance.
      Vol. XXVIII  (March 1973). pp. 19-33.
[4]   Brealcy, Richard A.  An  Introduction to  Risk  and
      Return from  Common Slocks. (Cambridge. Mass.: MIT
      Press, 1969.)
[5]   Fama.  Eugene F.   "Components  of  Investment  Per-
      formance."  The Journal of finance. Vol. XXVII (June
      1972), pp. 551-567.
[6]   Fama, Eugene  F., and  MacBcth, James  D. "Risk. Return
      and Equilibrium: Empirical Tests." Unpublished Working
      Paper No.  7237. University of Chicago. Graduate School
      of Business, August  1972.
[7]   Francis,  Jack  C.  Investment   Analysis anil
      Management.  (New York:  McGraw-Hill, 1972.)
[8]   Friend, Irwin.  and  Blume,  Marshall  E. "Risk  and  the
      Long Run Rate of Return on NYSE Common  Stocks."
      Working Paper No.  18-72. Wharton School of Commerce
      and  Finance,   Rodney  L.  White Center  for  Financial
      Research.
[9]   Jacob, Nancy. "The Measurement of  Systematic  Risk for
      Securities and  Portfolios: Some Empirical Results." Jour-
      nal  of Financial and  Quantitative  Analysis.  Vol. VI
      (March 1971). pp.  815-H34.
[10]  Jensen, Michael C. "The Performance  of Mutual Funds in
      the Period  1945-1964." Journal oj'Finance, Vol. XXIII
      (May  1968), pp. 389-416.
[II]  Jensen, Michael C.  "Risk, the Pricing of Capital Assets,
      and  the Evaluation  of Investment Portfolios." Journal of
      Business. Vol. 42  (April l'969), pp. 167-247.
[12]  Jensen,  Michael C.  "Capital  Markets: Theory  and
      Evidence."  The Hell Journal  of Economics  and
      Management  Science, Vol. 3 (Autumn 1972), pp. 357-
      398.
[13]  Levy, Robert A "On the Short Term  Stationarily of Held
      Coefficients."   Financial  Analysts  Journal,  Vol.  27
      (November-December  1971). pp. 55-62.
[14]  Lintncr,  John.  "The Valuation of Risk Assets  and  the
      Selection of Risky  Investments in  Stock Portfolios  and
      Capital Budgets." Review of Economics and Statistics,
      Vol.  XLV11 (February 1965), pp.  13-37.
[15]  Lintner. John,  "Security Prices, Risk,  and Maximal Gains
                                                        3-47

-------
      from  Diversification." Journal  of Finance, Vol. XX
      (December 1965). pp. 587-616.
116]  Mains, Nonmin I-'. "Are Mutual Fund  Hota Coeliieients
      Stationary'.1"  Unpublished  Working  Paper.  Investment
      Company. Institute, Washington,  D.C., October 1972.
[17]  Markowit/, Harry M. "Portfolio Selection." Journal  of
      Finance,  Vol. VII (March  1952), pp.  77-91.
[18]  Mnrkowitz,  Harry M. Portfolio  Selection: Efficient
      Diversification of Investments. (New York: John Wiley
      and Sons, 1959.)
[\9]  Miller, Merton H.,  and Scholcs,  Myron  S. "Rates  of
      Returns in Relation to Risk: A Roexamination of Recent
      Findings." Published in Studies in the Theory of Capital
      Markets, edited by Michael  Jensen. (New York: Pracger,
      1972), pp. 47-78.
[20]  Modigliani, Franco, and Poguc, Gerald A. A Study of In-
      vestment  Performance Fees. (Lexington, Mass.:  Heath-
      Lexington Books, Forthcoming 1974.)
[21 ]  Pogue, Gerald  A., and Conway, Walter.  "On the Stability
      of Mutual Fund  Beta Values."  Unpublished  Working
      Paper. MIT. Sloan  School of Management, June  1972.
|22|  Securities and  Exchange Commission, Institutional In-
      vestor Sluely Report of the Securities anil  Kxi'hnnxt
      Commission,  Chapter  4,  "Investment  Advisory  Com
      plexes",  pp.  .125-.147. (Washington, !).('.:  U.S. (iovern
      incut Printing Office,  1971.)
[23]  Sharpe, William F. "Capital  Asset Prices:  A  Theory <>
      Market Equilibrium under Conditions of Risk." Joitrnu
      of Finance,  Vol. XIX  (September 1964),  pp. 425-442
[24]  Sharpe,  William F.  Portfolio  Theory and  Capita
      Markets. (New York:  McGraw-Hill, 1970.)
[25]  Trcynor, Jack L. "How to  Rate the Management of In-
      vestment Funds." Harvard Business Review, Vol. XLIII
      (January-February  1965), pp. 63-75.
[26]  Treynor, Jack L. "The Performance of Mutual Funds in
      the Period 1945-1964: Discussion." Journal of Finance
      Vol. XXIII  (May   1968), pp. 418-419.
[27]  Wagner,  Wayne H., and Lau, Sheila. "The  Effect  o
      Diversification  on  Risk."  Financial Analysts Journal
      Vol. 26  (November-December 1971), pp. 48-53.
                                                     3-48

-------
           IV.   THE RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN REAL



            AND FINANCIAL MEASURES OF RISK








     Section  IV  is concerned with the real determinants of



the risk of common stocks as measured by their beta values.



By real determinants are meant variables which can be measured



directly from a firm's balance sheets and income statements.



The beta risk measure is the key variable of the Capital Asset



Pricing Model (CAPM) developed by Sharpe [26J, Lintner  [9],



and Mossin  [17].  Their model is given by
          E(R. )  =  RF +  BjtECiy   RF)                (3-5)
where
     E(R.)  =  the expected one-period rate of return



               on stock j



     E(RM)  =  the expected one-period return on the



               market portfolio



        RP  =  the one-period risk-free rate of interest



        B.  =  the beta value for stock j






The model states that the expected rate of return on the firm's



common stock (a financial asset) is a linear function of its



market risk measure, beta.  The model deals only with the



returns on financial assets.  It says nothing about how the



expected returns or beta values are related to characteristics



of firms' real assets that can be measured directly from
                       3-49

-------
accounting (i.e., book) data.  In other words, the CAPM says



nothing about the real determinants of beta.



     As will be shown below, there have been several empirical



investigations of the real or book characteristics of high-



risk firms.  The results are mostly consistent with intuition,



in that (various proxies for) earnings variability, growth,



cyclicality, and financial leverage are significantly



correlated with beta.  However, there is not much theory having



more than intuitive content.  The missing link is a dynamic



model of a firm's earnings behavior,  growth, and market



valuation.  The development of a fully rigorous and operational



theory of the real determinants of asset values is a difficult



task which, to date, has not been accomplished.



     Section IV is divided into three segments.  The first,



segment (a) presents a very complete  survey of the empirical



literature through mid-1973.  It was  prepared by Professor



Stewart C. Myers of MIT as Part I of  a paper entitled,  "The



Relationship between Real and Financial Measures of Risk and



Return" [22].  In segment (b) this survey is brought up to



date (mid-1975).  In segment (c)  the  current state of this



research is summarized.  Readers  interested only in the



conclusions and not the details can skip directly to segment



(c).
                         3-50

-------
(a)  Empirical Studies on the Real Determinants of Beta

     (Through Mid-1975)*  (Excerpt from a Paper [22]  by

     Professor Stewart C. Myers)

     This part reviews and summarizes all the empirical work

known to me relating to the real determinants of stocks'

systematic risk.  However, it is obviously impossible to

provide a full description of each study's experimental

design.  The following discussion is limited to the main ideas

and results.



Beaver, Kettler, and Scholes

     Beaver, Kettler and Scholes (BKS [2]) were the empirical

pioneers, although Ball and Brown's work  [1] preceded theirs.

However, the Ball and Brown paper is mostly devoted to ether,

broader issues, and the part investigating the real determinants

of systematic risk is much less ambitious and informative than

the BKS study.  In any event, Ball and Brown's results were

confirmed by BKS.

     BKS used seven accounting variables that intuition or

tradition suggest are associated with high-risk firms.

     1.   Dividend payout, defined as total dividends per

          share paid by the firm over a nine-year period,

          divided by total earnings per share over the same
* Footnotes and references for this section appear at the end
  of the article.   Reproduced with permission of Author
  and Publisher.
                          3-51

-------
     period.  Two arguments can be made for including



     payout as an independent variable.  First, most firms



     attempt to achieve stable (or stable growth in)



     dividends, and in normal times regard them almost



     as fixed liability.   Nevertheless, earnings have to



     cover dividends,  at  least in the long run.  The



     higher the variance  of earnings, the lower must the



     normal dividend be set in order to keep the proba-



     bility of "trouble"  (earnings less than the normal




     dividend)  acceptably low.   Thus  dividend  payout



     should be a proxy for management's uncertainty about



     future earnings.   Second,  firms  which grow rapidly



     usually retain a  greater proportion of earnings.



     Since there is a  long tradition  in the literature



     associating high  growth with high risk,  low dividend



     payout should be  a proxy for high risk.



2.    Growth, measured  by  the log of the five-year change



     in net book assets.   Again,  the  rationale is the



     traditional association between  rapid growth and



     high business risk.



3.    Financial leverage,  measured by  the ratio of book



     debt to net book  assets.   Given  business  risk, the



     CAPM predicts a positive linear  relationship between



     beta and the ratio of the market value of debt to



     the total market  value of the firm (debt  plus equity).
                     3-52

-------
     However, this relationship will be difficult to



     observe if firms with low business risk find they can



     issue more debt.   In the limiting case where firms



     keep the sum of business and financial risk constant,



     there will be no evident relationship between the



     debt ratio and beta  (until other variables successfully



     account for differences in business risk).



4.   Liquidity, measured by ratio of current assets to



     current liabilities.  This is widely used as measure



     of solvency by creditors.




5.   Size,  measured by the log of net book assets.   Casual



     observation suggests a relationship between size  and



     safety,  and to the extent that size reflects  diversi



     fication of activity, theory predicts that large  firms



     will have lower total risk.   There is no rigorous



     theory predicting that large firms have lower



     systematic risk, however.



6.   Earnings variability, measured by the standard



     deviation of earnings per share over nine years,



     where  each year's net earnings available to common



     is normalized by dividing by the value of the firm's



     stock  at the end of the preceding year.  It makes



     sense  to predict that firms  with highly volatile



     earnings will have highly volatile stock prices.
                      3-53

-------
          This means high total risk, however, not necessarily



          high systematic risk.  There is an empirical coriela



          tion between total and systematic risk, but this is



          to be expected, simply because the former includes



          the latter.   It is not true that increased total



          risk necessarily means increased systematic risk.



          Also, note that this variable is partly dependent on



          variable 3,  financial leverage:  the more debt the



          firm uses, the greater the variance of earnings



          available to common stockholders.



     7.   The "Earnings Beta", which is the slope coefficient



          of the regression of the  firm's  net earnings (again




          normalized by the preceding period's stock value)



          on the average normalized earnings for the entire



          sample of firms.   Thus it is a measure of cyclicality,



          that is, the extent to which fluctuations in the firm's



          earnings are correlated with fluctuations in earnings



          of firms generally.  Since stock prices clearly respond



          to earnings, both individually and generally,  the



          earnings beta and the stock beta ought to be strongly



          related.



     I  suspect that most readers will find this list of



variables intuitively reasonable.   The intuitive concept of



risk,  however, includes many things that are not necessarily
                          3-54

-------
related to risk as defined by the CAPM.  A rigorous a priori


hypothesis can be made with respect to only one of the seven


variables, namely financial leverage.  A less rigorous but


very plausible case can be made for variable 7, the "Accounting


Beta".  As for the other five variables, there is no theory.


     BKS tested the relationships between these variables and


beta by cross-sectional tests on a sample of 307 firms for


which complete accounting and stock price data were available


for the period 1947-65.  Actually, four separate tests were run


First, the data were split into two subperiods, 1947 56 and


1957-65.  Within each period, tests were performed both on


individual securities and on five-security portfolios.  The


portfolios were formed by ranking the stocks on basis of the


relevant accounting variable, and then assigning firms ranked


1 - 5 to portfolio 1, those ranked 6   10 to portfolio 2, etc.


Tests were then performed on portfolio averages of the

                               4
accounting variables and betas.


     For each of the four cases, pair-wise rank correlations


were calculated between each of the seven variables and


contemporaneous firm or portfolio betas.  The results are shown


in Table 1.  It is gratifying that leverage and the accounting


beta show the strong positive correlations expected on


theoretical grounds.  (In this case a rank correlation of


+0.14 is significant at approximately the one percent confi


dence level.)  Earnings variability and payout also have
                           3-55

-------
                       Table J


CONTEMPORANEOUS ASSOCIATION BETWEEN MARKET-DETERMINED

 MEASURE OF RISK AND SEVEN ACCOUNTING RISK MEASURES3


\l Q ~Y* 1 Q i\ 1 (^
V a. L JL d. L) J. C


Payout

Growth

Leverage

Liquidity

Size

Earnings
Variability
Accounting
Beta
Period
(1947-

Individual
Level
One
56)

Portfolio
Level

.49
( -50)
. 27
(.23)
.23
(.23)
-.13
( -13)
.06
( .07)
.66
(.58)
. 44
(.39)
-. 79
( -77)
. 56
(.51)
.41
(.45)
-.35
( -44)
- .09
(-.13)
.90
(.77)
.68
(.67)
Period Two
(195

Individual
Level
7-65)

Portfolio
Level

- .29
( -24)
.01
(.03)
.22
(.25)
.05
( -01)
.16
( -16)
.45
•"*" (.36)
. 23
(.23)
. 50
( -45)
.02
(.07)
.48
(.56)
.04
(-.01)
. 30
( -30)
.82
(.62)
.46
(.46)
     Rank correlation  coefficients  appear  in  top  row,
     and product-moment  correlations  appear in
     parentheses  in  bottom  row.
     The  portfolio  correlations  are based  on  61
     portfolios  of  5  securities  each.

     Source:   Beaver,  Kettler  and  Scholes  [2], p.  669.
                         3-56

-------
significant correlations in the expected direction.   Size has



a somewhat weaker correlation.  Finally, growth and liquidity,



although they were significantly correlated with beta in the



first subperiod, are totally unrelated in the second.   In view



of this, it is hard to put much faith in these two variables.



     Viewed as a whole, the results are encouraging.   Theory,



what there is of it, is supported, and intuition is confirmed.



However, one can obtain significant associations between



variables without actually explaining very much, and to some



extent that is the case here.  BKS ran a second test in which



they attempted to predict the 1957-65 betas by using the



accounting variables from the earlier 1947-56 period.   The



best explanator of the 1947-56 betas, as determined by



regression analysis, is a linear combination of dividend payout,



asset growth,and earnings variability.  This procedure explains



44.7 percent of the variance in the first period's betas.




However, when this equation is used to predict the 1957-65 betas,



using account variables from the first period, only 24 percent



of the variance is explained.  This is not too impressive,



considering that 21 percent is explained by the "naive" predic-



tion that the 1957-65 beta would be equal to the 1947-56 beta.



Nevertheless,  it is some improvement.  Moreover, it must be



remembered that 100 percent prediction accuracy is impossible.



Even if we knew the exact, true betas of all firms for the second
                             3-57

-------
period, we could not  predict  the  me a s u r e d betas,  for that would



require an exact a priori  prediction of the  sampling errors




encountered in estimation.








White



     White [15]  followed broadly  the same methodology as BKS,



but with important differences  in variable definition and in



the way the tests were carried  out.   He hypothesized three main



factors characteristic of  high-beta  firms:



       1.    High debt ratio.  This variable's  effect on beta



            is predicted by theory and supported  by the BKS



            results.   However,  White defined the  debt ratio ii



            terms of  market values,   which is  the specificatiDn



            called for by  theory.   BKS considered only variables



            that could be  derived from accounting data, and so



            restricted their  tests to  the book debt ratio.



       2.    Rapid growth in sales or operating earnings,



            measured  by the log of the relative change of the




            variable  over  the period examined.  BKS examined



            growth in book  assets but  obtained mixed results.



       3.    High asset beta,  defined as the  slope coefficient



            of a regression of  each  firm's  percentage change



            in sales  on the contemporaneous  percentage- change



            in gross  national product.   This is analogous to



            BKS's "accounting beta"  in that  each  measures firms'
                            3-58

-------
          cyclicality.  However, there are two important



          differences.  First, the index used is a national one,



          not simply an average taken over the firms in the



          sample under consideration.  Since the investor is



          concerned with the covariance of each stock's return



          with the rate of return on the entire market (and in



          principle with its covariance with changes in aggregate



          national wealth),  he should likewise be concerned with



          the covariance of each firm's income with national



          income.  It is true that the average earnings of any



          reasonably large sample of firms will be highly



          correlated with national income, but errors will



          necessarily enter if the sample average is used.



               The second difference between White and BKS's



          definition of cyclicality is that White used sales



          rather than earnings.  It is true that investors are



          more concerned with earnings than sales per se.  But



          it is expected earnings which determine stock prices,



          and changes in sales may be a better proxy for




          changes in expected earnings than is the one-period



          change in accounting earnings.  Accounting procedures



          induce various lags and biases in reported income,




          for example.



     Aside from differences  in variable definition, White's



study differs from BKS's in the use of relatively large port
                           3-59

-------
folios of securities as the basis for his cross-sectional



tests.  This has become standard operating procedure in tests



of the CAPM, since it vastly reduces errors in measurements of



individual firms'  betas;  these errors otherwise attenuate the



observed relationship between firms' betas and their average



returns.  The aim in the  present context is to reduce errors



both in measuring beta and in measuring the three hypothesized



determinants of beta.



     The regressions summarized in Table 2 are typical of White's



results.  In these tests  the 210 securities in White's sample



were grouped into 10 portfolios of 31 securities each.   (The



31 stocks with the highest betas were put in portfolio 1,  the



31 with the next highest  betas in portfolio 2, etc.)    Then



four cross-sectional regressions were run, using as independent



variables various  combinations of the portfolios'  asset betas,



debt ratios, and rates of sales or earnings growth.  As is



obvious from the table, White found significant relationships,



in the expected direction, for all variables.   He also explained



a much higher proportion  of the variance in the betas,  although



it must be remembered that in this test there are only 10 port-



folio betas to be explained.




     These tests were successfully repeated for various sub-



periods within the 1951-68 period,7 but I will not attempt



to present all the results here.  It should be noted, however,
                          3-60

-------
                   Table 2



WHITE'S REGRESSION RESULTS l;0!l 10 PORTFOLIOS



       OF 31 SECURITIES EACH, 1951-68
Regression

1
(R2 = .71)
2
(R2 = .85)
3
(R2 = .96)
4
(R2 = .97)
Variable
Constant

0- 505
(4.54)a
0.153
(0.969)
-0.347
( 2.31)
-0. 294
( 2.53)
Asset
Beta

0.325
(4.38)
0.247
(3.88)
0.274
(7.65)
0.220
(7.22)
Market
Debt Ratio



2.45
(2.62)
2. 35
(4.56)
1.69
(3.62)
Sales
Growth





7.16
(4.10)


Earnings
Growth







7.68
(5.03)
  T-statistics  in parentheses  below  coefficients




  Source:  White  [15],  Table  4.6.
                      3-61

-------
that the coefficients of the growth variables dropped to


insignificant levels when White repeated his tests for the


1961-68 subperiod.   This matches BKS's findings.  However,


since the asset beta—the "cyclicality" variable—and the debt


ratio both have a strong positive relationship with beta, it


is fair to say that White's results support the conclusions of


the BKS study, and of course vice versa.




Gonedes


     Gonedes's work [4]  provides additional, and somewhat


discouraging, evidence on the importance of BKS's accounting


beta as a determinant of firms'  stock  betas.  He dealt with a


random sample of 99 firms for the period 1946-67, and three


seven-year subperiods, 1946-52,  1953-59,  and 1961-67.  (The


data for 1960 were reserved for various statistical tests


which will not be reviewed here.)  The accounting betas were


measured by regressions  of the form



          X.   -  a + blXm + C.Xj + 3.                     (2)


where:

          Oi
          X.   =  firm j's earnings

          •\j
          XM  =  aggregate earnings of all firms for which


                 complete data were available over the


                 1946-68 period
                          3-62

-------
          a/
          Xj  =  that part of the aggregate earnings of


                 all other firms in j ' s industry which


                 could not be explained by XM

          •v
          e-  =  an error term reflecting unsystematic risk


The 99 firms in the sample were randomly selected from industries


for which adequate indexes could be constructed.


     Regressions were run using net income (after interest and


taxes), net income normalized by net book assets, and first


differences of these two variables.  As it turned out only the


first differences gave significant results.


     Gonedes tested for correlation between stock betas and


accounting betas measured in terms of scaled net income and


found no significant relationship for any subperiods .  This is


exactly counter to the BKS results.  However, some positive


relationship was found for accounting betas derived  from first


differences in scaled income.  This is again counter to BKS,


who found that this procedure gave poorer results for their


s amp 1 e . v


     Table 3 shows the correlations obtained using accounting


betas derived from first differences of scaled net income.


Significant relationships are found for the 1946-52  and 1953-59


subperiods when accounting betas are derived from the full 21


years of data, but the relationship disappears in the 1960's.


There is  no relationship at all when the accounting  betas are


measured from seven years' data, but this probably indicates


only that accounting betas are  hard to measure with a handful


of observations.


                          3-63

-------
                    Table 3



CORRELATION BETWEEN ACCOUNTING AND STOCK BETAS



              —GONEDES'S RESULTS






(Accounting betas derived from first  differences



   in net income scaled by net book assets.)
Accounting Beta
Measured over:

1946-68
(Excluding 1960)
1946-52

1953-59

1961-68

Stock Beta Measured Over:
1946-52

.32b
(.22)a
.29b
(.05)




1953-59

.41b
(-34)b


.0
(.04)


1961-68

.08
(.0)




.07
(.0)
   Significant  at  5  percent  confidence  level.



   Significant  at  1  percent  confidence  level.



   Source:   Gonedes  [4],  Table  5,  pp.  434-35.
                      3-64

-------
     Gonedes also tested for correlation between the coeffi
                          ^
cients of determination  (R~'s) of the equations used to estimate


the accounting and stock betas.  The proposition is that if the


earnings index explains  a large proportion of the variance of


a firm's earnings, then  the stock market index ought to explain


a large proportion of the variance in returns on the firm's


stock.  Gonedes found this to be true, so long as accounting


betas were derived from  first differences in accounting income.


This is certainly evidence of an association between the cyclic-


ality of a firm's earnings and its stock's market prices.


However, correlating R 's and correlating betas are not the


same thing, since a firm can have a low R  and high beta,  or


conversely.  Thus it is  no paradox to find significant correla-

         7
tion of R°'s but insignificant correlation of accounting and


stock betas.


     There is no obvious reason for the differences between

                q
BKS and Gonedes.   Particularly in view of White's results, it


seems fair to claim that cyclicality, somehow measured, is a


determinant of beta.  But the measurement of cyclicality and


the exact specification  of its relationship to beta still pose


difficult problems.





Rosenberg and McKibben


     One interesting aspect of the tests described so  far is


that they have uniformly assumed (1J substantial cross - sectional


variance of betas and the real determinants of beta, but
                           3-65

-------
 (2) stability of these variables across  time  for  each  firm.



 Assumption  (2) is implicit in the way  the  betas  and  the  inda-



 pendent variables are measured.  However,  it  is  obviously



 questionable.  There is no reason to expect the  determinants of



 beta  to be  strictly constant across time,  and  if  the determinants



 change, beta ought to change too.



      Rosenberg and McKibben  [14] use an  interesting  test  which



 explicitly  assumes that beta shifts over time.  Space  is



 insufficient for a full presentation, but  the  idea is  this.



 Suppose beta at time t is linearly related to  certain  real



 determinants W ..  For firm  i,
              nt             J
This relationship is assumed to apply to all firms and  to be



constant over time.  However the real determinants vary  across



firms and time, and thus so will beta.



     Substituting Equation  (3) into Equation (1) we have:

Normally beta is estimated by fitting the regression equation





          S\       /S        l~\j       XV


          "jt  =  aj  +  Vmt  +  6jt                     C5)






where the rt's are returns in excess of the risk-free rate.








                           3-66

-------
But if Equation  (4) is  correct,  (5)  is incorrect, since it



assumes the true value  o£ beta  is  constant.   Instead we should



'run the regression




                          N

          rit  =  ai  +   I   b-  (W.  . r ^J   +  e..         (6J
           It       ]      = i    J   3nt  mt       it





where the independent variables  are  (W.   r   ) , the products of



the market excess returns and the  hypothesized determinants of



beta.  This procedure allows a  direct measurement of the b.'s in



Equation  (3).  This one-step procedure is in  contrast to the three



studies cited above, in which a  two-step test was required—



one step  to estimate the betas  and their hypothesized determi



nants , and another  to see whether  the hypothesized variables



explain the cross - sectional differences in firms' betas.



     The  results of most interest  here were obtained by pooling



time series data (yearly observations) and cross-sectional data



for 558 firms over  the  1954-66 period.  (The  data have to be



pooled because the  b.'s in  Equations  (3) and  (6) are assumed to



be the same for  all firms.)  Unfortunately, the results are hard



to compare with  those of BKS, White  or Gonedes, since Rosenberg



and McKibben tried  thirty-one independent variables, of which



eleven are based on stock market data.  Thus,  if we find that



a variable which we expect  to work does not,  this may simply



be due to its collinearity with  one  or more of the other 30



variables.  There are four  direct measures of  firm growth,



for example,  and at least three  other variables which might
                           3-67

-------
reasonably be expected to proxy for growth.   What is one to



conclude from the failure or success of any one of these




variables ?



     Moreover, the inclusion of variables derived from stock



market data hampers our quest for the real determinants of



beta, since the market behavior of the firm's stock responds



to the real variables and to some extent proxies for them.   In



any case, these financial variables are not  usually available



for specific real assets.  (They are for firms, which are



collections of assets, but in many instances that is not much



help.)



     This is actually unfair to Rosenberg and McKibben, who



were largely concerned with forecasting betas.   Nevertheless,



their paper strikes me in the same way that  Chinese cooking



strikes some people who are brought up on meat, potatoes and



gravy.  You may be served nine courses, each one delicious,



but a half hour after leaving the restaurant you're hungry



again.  Here we have 31 plausible variables, but a half hour



after reading the paper it's hard to say what's been learned



about the real determinants of beta.



     Of course this is an exageration, because Rosenberg and



McKibben do confirm the results of BKS, White and Gonedes in



several respects.  First, financial leverage is again found



to have a significant positive relationship with beta.   Second,



a positive and highly significant relationship is found for
                          3-68

-------
volatility in earnings, measured by the standard deviation of



changes in earnings per share over time.  Third, strong positive



relationships are found for growth in sales and earnings (con-



firming White and BKS).




     On the other hand, no significant relationship is found



for either the accounting beta or the dividend payout ratio,



which is generally contrary to the other authors I have cited.



Whether this is an actual failure of these variables given the



Rosenberg-McKibben sample and methodology, or whether it is



simply a matter of multicollinearity, is hard to say.



     There were several other variables tested.  Most were



insignificant and some of those that were significant had



unexpected signs.  Since I could make no sense out of these



variables, they will not be reviewed here.  Rosenberg and



McKibben note that the pattern of signs does not correspond to



their a priori expectations.








A Tentative Summary



     There are several other studies which shed light on the



real determinants of beta, but it seems inefficient to lay out



the results of each.   Instead I will propose a tentative



summary at this point, and then note whether the other studies



support or weaken this view-  It seems safe to identify four




factors which generally contribute to high stock betas.



     1.   Cyclicality.  This broad term is meant to include



          BKS's "accounting beta" and the corresponding risk
                           3-69

-------
measures used in the other studies discussed above.



Specific definitions vary, but each study started



from the same hypothesis,  namely that beta depends



on the covariance between swings in the firm's



earnings and swings in earnings in the economy



generally.   This hypothesis is not based on a fully



rigorous model, but it is  so much in the spirit of



the CAPM that it is hard not to hold it a priori.



The empirical results of BKS and White strongly



support the idea and Gonedes's work partly supports



it.  Rosenberg and McKibben do not find the accounting



beta to be significantly related to the stock beta,



but I am inclined to think that the effect was stolen



by one of their 30 other independent variables.



Earnings Variability.  Both BKS and Rosenberg-McKibben



find earnings volatility to be strongly related to



beta.  This is mildly disturbing from a theoretical



point of view  since earnings volatility represents



the total, not the systematic risk of earnings;  we



would expect it to be less important than the



"accounting beta" or some other measure of cyclicality



Nevertheless, earnings variability corresponds closely



to the popular, intuitive idea of firm risk, and it is



sensible proxy for cyclicality.  Thus, it certainly



belongs on any tentative list of real factors



associated with beta.
                3-70

-------
          However, it  is unfortunate that no studies have



          separated the variance of firms' earnings into



          systematic and unsystematic components, and tested



          which component is more strongly related to beta.



          If the CAPM  is right, the systematic component ought



          to be more important.



     3-   Financial Leverage.  Theory specifies a relationship



          between the  market debt ratios  and beta, but the



          effect comes through strongly even when the book



          debt ratio is used.



     4.   Growth, which can be measured in a variety of ways.



          BKS, White and Rosenberg-McKibben all found growth



          to be important, although the effect seems less



          strong in the 1960's than earlier.  BKS also found



          dividend payout to be important, which is consistent,



          since rapid  growth normally is  associated with low



          payout, and  there is no reason  for dividend policy



          per se to affect risk.



               It is not at all clear how best to measure



          growth.   Moreover, the studies  cited have not drawn



          a clear distinction between growth as expansion  and



          growth defined as the opportunity to invest in projects



          offering expected rates of return exceeding the  cost




          of capital.



     Several other comments should be made before turning  to



other studies.   First, none of the four investigations described
                           3-71

-------
above has a complete theoretical base.  The authors would

of course agree, and note their willingness to use one as

soon as it is discovered.  But we must bear in mind that the

puzzles they encountered may be due to use of the wrong

functional specification.  Rosenberg and McKibben do at least

assume a specific, plausible specification and develop consis-

tent tests, but they would agree that their choice of inde-

pendent variables is not based on any clear theory.

     In the absence of theory there are many intuitively

appealing variables and several plausible ways to measure each

of them.   This naturally makes it difficult to compare the

studies cited, except by thinking in terms of general factors

like "growth" or "cyclicality."



Other Studies
     Several other empirical studies investigate the real

determinants of beta.   Since there are limits both to space

and to the reader's patience, I have chosen not to review them

in detail.  Instead I  will briefly describe whether they

support or weaken the  case for the four general determinants

of beta suggested just above.

     Cyclicality.  The work of Pettit and Westerfeld [13] and

Gordon and Halpern [6] deals primarily with cyclicality as a
                                 I
possible determinant of beta.  The former derived an "earnings

beta" by first fitting a trend line to firms' earnings per share,

scaled by average earnings per share over the period investi
                          3-72

-------
gated, and also to the scaled earnings of the Standard and



Poor's 500 Stock Index.  Then the earnings beta was defined



as the covariance of the residuals from these trend lines.



A highly significant pairwise correlation was found between



this statistic and the firms' stock betas.  The relationship



persisted when the earnings beta was combined with several



other independent variables in a multiple regression.   Finally,



these tests were successfully repeated with a different



earnings beta based on operating income.



     Gordon and Halpern provide additional evidence as a by-



product of their application of the CAPM to the problem of



estimating the cost of capital for a division of a firm.



Their earnings beta was based on the covariance between the



rates of growth of firms' earnings per share and growth rates



for economy-wide corporate profits.  Again, a strong positive



correlation between earnings betas and stock betas was found.



     Earnings variability.  Lev and Kunitsky [10] find that



stock betas are significantly related to the degree of



"smoothness" of various operating and financial series,



principally earnings, dividends, sales and capital expenditure.



Smoothness is measured as the mean absolute deviation of the



actual values of the variable from its trend.   (If smoothness



is S, then a perfectly smooth series will have  S = 0.)



Clearly this is another way of defining volatility; thus, the



discovery of a significant positive relationship between S and



the stock beta confirms the results reported earlier in this




paper.




                          3-73

-------
     On the other hand, it is not obvious why the smoothness



of dividends, sales and capital expenditures should matter at



all once earnings volatility is accounted for.   There are two



possible lines of response.   The first, and simplest, is to



say that any simple measure  of earnings volatility is an



imperfect representation of  investors'  actual uncertainty



about the firm's future earnings.  In this case we can regard



the other smoothness measures as useful additional proxies.



Lev and Kunitsky see something deeper,  however.   They argue



that firms' managers are engaged in a continual battle to



control the environment, and that the greater their success,



the lower their firms'  stocks'  betas.  Control  of environment



is effected by reducing the  variance of each of the firm's



major activities, not just the variance of the  end result,



earnings.  Thus, smoothness  of sales would have a place even



if there were no problems in measuring  earnings volatility



directly.  Unfortunately, these explanations are not mutually



exclusive, and there is no way to distinguish between them



from the results at hand.



     The role of earnings volatility is also supported by



Lev [9 ] who shows that firms with high operating leverage



(that is, high ratios of fixed to total costs)  tend to have



high betas.   This is sensible since high operating leverage



is by definition associated  with high earnings  volatility and



high earnings betas.
                          3-74

-------
     Both Pettit and Westerfeld [13] and Melicher [11] confi m



that firms with low dividend payout ratios tend to have high



betas.   This too supports the case of earnings volatility, since



low dividend payout is a natural response of a mangement that



is uncertain about future earnings.



     The only authors who do not find a reliable positive



association between earnings volatility and beta are Breen and



Lerner  [3].  However, their results can be attributed to an



inappropriate measure of volatility and to their attempt to



measure volatility from severely limited time series data.



     Financial Leverage.  The debt ratio performs somewhat



erratically in the studies of Pettit-Westerfeld, Breen and Lerner,



and Melicher.  In the first case, the book debt ratio is not



significant in a multiple regression with several other inde-



pendent variables.  In Breen and Lerner, the debt ratio is



significant  but inexplicably of the wrong sign in two out of



twelve subsamples.  Melicher found it significant only when



the  square of the debt ratio was also introduced.



     These results are not fatal to the theoretical prediction



of a positive relationship between the debt ratio and stock



beta, other things being equal.  You can argue that other



things  are not equal, so that other variables may be obscuring



or proxying for the hypothesized effect.  Nevertheless, these



results introduce the seed of doubt.



     Fortunately for theory, Hamada [8 ] devined an indirect



test which isolates the effect of financial leverage on beta.
                           3-75

-------
There is, of course,  substantial variance in the cross - sectional



distribution of stocks'  betas,  even for firms in the same



industry.  Since debt ratios also vary, theory would predict



that part of the dispersion is  due to different debt policies.



Therefore,Hamada grouped a sample of firms into nine reasonably



homogenous industries and computed "unlevered betas" for each



firm.  The unlevered betas were estimates—based on theory, the



stock beta and the observed debt ratio—of the beta the firms



would have had if their  debt ratios were zero.  Hamada's predic-



tion was that the dispersion of the firms' betas would be reduced



by this unlevering process.   (If the stock beta were unrelated



to leverage,  then the dispersion would be unaffected by unlevering



Since each industry group was chosen to hold other determinents



of beta roughly constant, the unlevered beta estimates should



cluster more closely around some true "industry beta.")



Hamada's prediction is confirmed by his results, which justify



substantial  confidence in the link between financial leverage



and the stock beta.



     Growth.  Growth is  the weakest of the four candidates



which I tentatively proposed as real determinants of beta.



Its weaknesses show up again in Pettit and Westerfeld's study.



Although they find a significant pairwise correlation between



the growth rate of earnings per share and the stock beta, the



variable is  insignificant in multiple regressions.  Breen and



Lerner find  a generally  significant relationship, but again it



has the wrong sign (negative) in two of the twelve subsamples



examined.




                          3-76

-------
     On the other hand, the dividend payout ratio  is negative




and significant in these two studies, as well as  in Mclicher's.




Perhaps this ratio is simply a better proxy for the firm's




growth prospects.  Unfortunately, none of the studies cited in




this paper have attempted to determine what the dividend payout




ratio is really proxying for, or whether it has an independent



effect on beta.








Summary




     The empirical evidence on the real determinants of beta




can be summed up in two sentences.  At least three real factors




can be identified with relative confidence, namely financial




leverage, cyclicality and volatility of operating earnings




(although the third may be proxying for the second).  Growth




is a possible fourth variable, but its performance in the




empirical work cited has been erratic.




     The summary has to be brief, because there is very little




to say once the four factors are noted.  despite  the substantial




number of studies cited, there is scant agreement on how the




factors are to be measured and the exact specification of their




effects on beta.   Theory gives no guidance  (except in the case




of financial leverage) , so there is little  to say beyond the




generalities in the paragraph just above.   Further progress in




understanding the real determinants -of beta depends on the




development of a theory which specifies the relevant variables




and how they should in principle be measured.  A  modest




beginning is made in the next section.




                           3-77

-------
                         FOOTNOTES

                FOR S.  C.  MYERS'  ARTICLE



1.     The best-known proponent  of this  view is Gordon [5].


2.     Hamada [8].


3.     Dyer has  found evidence of  this  effect.   See J.  Dyer,

      "Financial Leverage,  Business  Risk and the Tax Subsidy
                  I
      to debt:  An  Empirical Study."  Unpublished M.Sc.  Thesis,

      MIT, 1974.


4.     Errors in observing  true  values  of beta and the accounting

      variables ought to be reduced  by  forming portfolios.


5.     The explanatory power was only slightly less when the

      accounting beta was  substituted  for earnings volatility.


6.     Actually, White used the  ratio)  of  the book value of debt

      to the market value  of equity.   It is the divergence

      between book and market values of equity which causes

      most of the  error in the  book  debt ratio.


7.     And also  for various portfolio sizes, variable definitions,

      etc.


8.     Beaver, Kettler .and  Scholes [2],  p. 667.


9.     It might  be  noted that Gonedes's  sample was smaller than

      that of BKS  or White, and moreover that his sample was

      concentrated in a few specific industries.  Gonedes
                           3-78

-------
       properly criticizes BKS for normalizing the earnings  of


       firms in their sample by past market values of equity.


       Firms with high betas will tend to have more volatile


       equity values, and under BKS's procedure,  will auto-


       matically tend to have more volatile earnings and higher


       accounting betas.  Thus BKS are not correlating beta  solely


       with accounting variables, but also with stock price


       volatility.



10.     Rosenberg and McKibbin [14], p. 327.



11.     This follows from Miller and Modigliani's well known


       proof of the irrelevance of dividend policy [12].



12.     They first fitted a trend line to five years'  earnings


       per share data, and then measured volatility as the


       proportion of the variance explained by the trend.   This


       is a poor procedure, not only because of the small  number


       of earnings  observations, but because there is no necessary

                             2
       relationship between R  and the standard deviation of the


       series.   A firm's earnings could have a low standard devia-

                                 2
       tion but no  trend and an R  of essentially zero.  Breen

                                      2
       and Lerner would take the low R  as evidence of high


       volatility in earnings.
                            3-79

-------
               REFERENCES FOR EXCERPT FROM



                  S.  C.  MYERS'  ARTICLE








1.     Ball,  R.  and P.  Brown,  "Portfolio Theory and Accounting,"



      Journal of Accounting Research, 7 (Autumn 1969), 300-323.








2.     Beaver, W.  H.,  P.  Kettler and M.  Scholes, "The Association



      Between Market  Determined and Accounting Determined Risk



      Measures," Accounting Review, XLV (October 1970),  654-82.








3.     Breen, W.  J.  and E.  M.  Lerner, "Corporate Financial



      Strategies and  Market Measures of Risk and Return,"



      Journal of Finance, XXVIII (May 1974), 339-52.








4.     Gonedes,  N.  J.,  "Evidence on the Information Content of



      Accounting Numbers:  Accounting-Based and Market-Based



      Estimates  of Systematic Risk," Journal of Financial and



      Quantitative Analysis,  VIII  (June 1973), 407-44.








5.     Gordon, M.  J.,  The Investment, Financing and Valuation of



      the Corporation  (Homewood, Illinois:  Richard D.  Irwin,



      1962).








6.     	 and  P-  Halpern, "Cost of Capital for a



      Division of a Firm,"  Journal of Finance, XXIX (September



      1974), 1153-64.






                           3-80

-------
 7.     Hamada,  R. ,  "Portfolio Analysis, Market Equilibrium




       and Corporate Finance," Journal of Finance, XXIV



       (March 1969) , pp.  13-31.








 8.     	,  "The Effect of the Firm's Capital Structure



       on the Systematic Risk of Common Stocks," Journal of



       Finance, XXVII (May 1972), 435-52.








 9.     Lev, B., "On the Association Between Operating Leverage



       and Risk,"  Journal of Financial and Quantitative Analysis,



       IX  (September 1974), 627-42.








10.     	 and S.  Kunitsky, "On the Association Between



       Smoothing Measures and the Risk of Common Stocks,"



       Accounting  Review, XLIX (April 1974), 259-70.








11.     Melicher, R. W., "Financial Factors Which Influence Beta



       Variations  Within a Homogeneous Industry Environment,"



       Journal  of Financial and Quantitative Analysis, IX (March




       1974), 231-43.








12.     Miller,  M.  H. and F. Modigliani, "Dividend Policy, Growth



       and the  Valuation of Shares," Journal of Business,



       34  (October  1961), 411 53.
                            3-81

-------
13.     IVttit,  R.  arid R.  Wester f eld,  "A Model of Capital Asset



       Risk," Journal of Financial and Quantitative Analysis,



       7 (March 1972),  1649-68.








14.     Rosenberg,  B.  and  W.  McKibben,  "The Prediction of



       Systematic  and Specific Risk in Common Stocks,"



       Journal  of  Business  and Quantitative Analysis, VIII



       (March 1973),  317-34.








15.     White, R.,  "On the Measurement  of Systematic Risk,"



       Unpublished Ph.D.  Dissertation,  MIT, 1972.
       (End of Excerpt  from  S.  C.  Myers'  Article.)
                            3-82

-------
(b)   Recent Studies



     Two new studies have been published since the Myers



survey.  The first is by Be.iver and Manegold, the second by




Gonedes.








Beaver and Manegold



     The Beaver and Manegold Study  [l] concentrates exclusively



on the relationship between market  and accounting betas.



     The market betas were computed in the usual manner by



regressing monthly  stock returns  on the  corresponding returns



for the NYSE index.  Three accounting betas  were  computed  for



each stock using  different definitions of  accounting return.



 (Note  that the  lack of  a theoretical  model  leaves  the specifi



cation of  the accounting return  unclear.)   The  returns  used



were:  (1)  net income to total  assets,  (2)  earnings  to net  worth,



 and  (3) earnings  to market value of net  work (shares x  price).



These  returns were computed  for  each  sample firm (254  companies)



 for  each  test year (1951-69).   The first two return measures



 are  based  solely  on book data, the third combines book and



market data.  For each  year,  the returns on the index  portfolios




 were  unweighted averages of the 254 stock returns.



      The  data base for  the study consisted of 254 firms (all



 those  on  the Compustat  Annual Industrial Tape with complete



 data over the  1951-69  test period).  Betas were computed  for



 the  total  period and for two subperiods (1951-60, 1961-69).



 In addition to  the procedures summarized here, several other
                           3-83

-------
refinements were employed to reduce sampling errors in the



estimated market and accounting betas (for example, a Bayesian



correction to the market betas; also accounting betas were



produced using first differences of accounting returns).



     The end result of these various testing refinements  was



378 sets of market and accounting betas.   A correlation



coefficient was measured for each set.   Of the 378 total, 363



of the coefficients were statistically  significant bevond the



0.01 level, while 375 (all but threej were significant beyond



the 0.05 level.  The implications of this finding are that



across a wide variety of specifications  for accounting betas



and market betas, there is a statistically significant



relationship between the two.   Alternatively stated,  there



appears to be a significant relationship  between risk as



reflected in security prices  and risk  as reflected in



accounting earnings data, and the existence of the relation-



ship can be detected in a variety of forms.



     Apart from the issue of statistical  significance  is



the magnitude of the correlation coefficients.   For the



total period, cross-sectional differences in the 254



accounting betas explained only about 15  to 20 percent of



the cross section variation in market betas.  For the first



period, the proportion explained is approximately 20  to 25



percent.   For the second period the account betas based



on the first two accounting return measures explain only 3



to 6 percent and the third form of the  accounting betas



explains about 25 percent.




                          3-84

-------
     A sample scattergram (one of 378 possible) is shown in



Figure 3-4.  The figure shows the relationship between total



period market betas  (vertical axis) versus total period



accounting betas.  The accounting betas are based on the net



income to total assets return measure.  The fact that a



relationship exists between the market and accounting betas



is evident from Figure 3-4.  It is also evident, however, that



accounting betas do not explain much of the variation in



market betas.




     The small proportion of variation accounted for in the



Beaver Manegold Study is due to a combination of two reasons.



First, the accounting betas have substantial measurement



errors (high standard errors) due to the small number of



annual observations available (compared with the market betas



which are based on monthly data).  Second, the accounting beta



is only one of several possible factors that determine a



securities systematic risk.  While both factors are obviously



involved, it is not possible to determine their relative



importance in this study.








Gonedes



     A second article by Gonedes was published in June 1975  [5]



updating his earlier results [4].  The topic again was the



relationship between market and accounting betas.



     The model used to obtain market betas was the familiar




market model



          Rit  =  Oi + 0. Rmt + eit                     (3-6)





                          3-85

-------
                        1.7Jo«	
      SCATTER DIASgAH
MAKKEI BETA VEBSUS ACCOOBTTJIC BETA
                  TOTAL
                  PERIOD,
                  NOHBAYKSIAN
                  MARKET
                  BETA
                                               * * * u *  *
                                            u   »    •   *
                                               » e * *
                                                        C. S /4
                                              TOTAL PERIOD, EWNBAYESIAN, REGULAR
                                                  NL/TA ACCOUNTING BETA
                  Figure  3-4.
Scatter  diagram:   market  beta
versus  accounting beta.  (Source:
Beaver,  W.  and Manegold,  J.,  [1],
Figure  5, page 259.)
                                           3-86

-------
where

      it  =  ^e ra^e °f return on security i during

             period t (tilde (^) denotes random variable)

             the rate of return on the market portfolio
     R
      mt
             in period t
An analogous model was used to measure the accounting betas

(designated 6 in Equation  (3-7)):
where
     •\j
     V-.   =  the rate of return, based on accounting numbers,

             for firm i in period t
     a.
     V    =  the market-wide index of rates of return, based

             on accounting numbers


     The specific measure of accounting return used by Gonedes

was the ratio of net income (for year t) to the book value of

common equity at the beginning of year t.  The market-wide

index of returns used was a common-equity-weighted index of

the accounting returns for the firms in the sample.   (The

method of index construction was one of the principal

differences between the two Gonedes studies.)

     In addition, accounting betas were produced using first

differences of the stock and index accounting returns.

          The data sample contained 316 firms (as opposed to

99 in the first study).   The accounting betas were computed
                          3-87

-------
from annual data for the period 1940-69 (excluding 1953, 1960,

and 1968, which were reserved for various predictive tests

not described here).  The market betas were computed using

monthly data for three intervals, 1946-52, 1953-60, and 1961-68.

The 316 accounting betas were then correlated with the market

betas from each of the subperiods.  The results were somewhat

more encouraging than in the first study.   The accounting betas

produced from Equation (3-7) tend to be significantly relat3d to

the market betas, which was not the case in the earlier stuiy.

Further, the difference in the results for the ordinary and

first difference accounting returns is now almost negligibls

(which is more consistent with the findings of the other

studies).  However, Gonedes still finds the proportion of the

variation in market betas explained by the accounting betas

to be smaller than in other studies.  For example, the propor-

tion of cross-sectional variation explained in the various

Gonedes regressions ranged from only I to 2 percent	very

small indeed.




(c)  Summary

     The research into the nature of the real determinants of

beta is almost entirely of an empirical nature.  Much of the

confusion that exists with respect to the measurement of
                                  i
variables,  the specification of tests, and the interpretation

of empirical findings results directly from the lack of an

acceptable  theoretical framework.   The empirical studies have
                          3-88

-------
identified four factors which seem to be systematically related
to beta:  cyclicality and variability of earnings, leverage,
and growth.

     i-   Cyclicality of Earnings
          Cyclicality is the tendency for corporate earnings
to move with earnings in the economy generally.  Earnings
have been measured in different ways in the various studies.
However, the accounting return on equity is commonly used
(earnings divided by book value of equity).   Cyclicality is
measured by an accounting beta, computed by regressing these
returns on market-wide index of accounting returns (see
Equation (3-7)).  The accounting betas are typically found to be
related to the market betas in a statistically significant
manner.  However, the authors disagree on the proportion of
the cross - sectional variation in market betas explained by the
accounting betas;  percentages range from 1 percent to 40
percent, depending on the sample of firms and time periods
involved.  A best guess would put the central tendency between
10 and 20 percent.

     ii.  Earnings Variability
          Earnings variability is measured by the standard
deviation of historical earnings.  It is a measure of the
total risk-of book earnings, while cyclicality is a measure
of systematic earnings risk.  Several studies have found
                          3-89

-------
variability as well as cyclicality to be strongly related  lo



the market beta.  This result is somewhat surprising, since



portfolio theory would predict that only the systematic



component of earnings risk and not the total should be important,



It may well be, however, that the variability is serving as a



proxy for cyclicality.  It is hoped that future studies will



more carefully segregate the systematic and nonsystematic



components of book earnings risk.








     iii.  Leverage



          Financial leverage (the ratio of debt to total



assets) shows up significantly in almost all the studies where



it  is considered.  This is true whether the debt ratio is



defined in book (i.e., accounting) or market value terms.



Leverage is the one variable for which a specific theoretical



relationship exists.   As given by Hamada [6],






          BL  =  B0 (l + (1   TC) f |                   (3-8)




where




     BL  =  the market beta for the stock of a levered



            firm




     BO  =  the unlevered beta (i.e.,  the beta of the



            stock if the firm was all-equity financed)



      g-  =  the market value debt- tto- equity ratio






Thus,  for  firms with  similar business  risks (as reflected  by



BQ),  the use of leverage will directly increase the risk of
                          3-90

-------
the common stock (as given by $T).   This relationship, while
                               ]_j


difficult to test directly, has been tested in indirect ways.



The results support the hypothesis (see Hamada [7]).






     iv.  Growth



          Growth is measured in various ways in the different



studies (e.g., growth in earnings or sales) and captured by



various proxies  (e.g., dividend payout ratio).  The growth



variables were the most erratic of these four determinants.



It is commonly held that high-growth firms are riskier (i.e.,



they have higher market betas).  This hypothesis was not



conclusively borne out in the studies reviewed.  In some of



the multiple regressions growth was significant, but sometimes



the relationship was the reverse to that predicted.
                           3-91

-------
                 FOOTNOTES FOR PART 3
1.     The summary of  risk-return  concepts  contained in



      Section II  is based  on  a  presentation  by Stewart C



      Myers  and Gerals A.  Pogue [20], pp.  A3-A20.
                         3-92

-------
        ESTIMATION OF THE COST OF CAPITAL




       FOR MAJOR UNITED STATES INDUSTRIES




WITH APPLICATION TO POLLUTION-CONTROL INVESTMENTS
              PART 4.  ESTIMATION
               Dr. Gerald A. Pogue



                  4 Summit Drive



            Manhasset, New York  11030
                   November  1975

-------
                    I.  INTRODUCTION l
     Part 4 contains the estimation methodology and empirical



results.   It is divided into seven sections.



     Section II shows how the discounted cash flow cost of



capital models and the risk-return concepts of Parts 2 and 3,



respectively, can be combined to produce cross-sectional esti



mation equations.  Section III describes the primary and



secondary company samples used in the study.  Section IV



presents the equity risk measures for sample firms.  Section V



describes the procedures used to estimate the cross - sectional



regression variables and presents the cost of equity capital



estimates.  Section VI contains the methodology used to



estimate weighted average costs of capital and presents the



results.   Finally, Section VII shows how the weighted costs



are likely to change during the 1975-84 period given estimates




of future interest rates.
                           4-1

-------
                    11.   METHODOLOGY
(a)  Combining the Cost of Capital and Risk-Return Models


     In Part 2 three security valuation models were presented


which permitted estimates of a firm's cost of equity capital.


The models differ only in their assumptions regarding the firm's


future investment opportunities.   The models are:


     1.   Perpetual Growth Model


                     Di
               R  =  /  +  g                           (2-8)



     2.   No (Real) Growth Model




               R  =  P^                                 (2-10)


     3.   Finite-Period (Real) Growth Model


                     E,     I1
               R  =  p1  +  pi (r - R)T                 (2-12)
                      0      0



where the variables in the three  models are collectively


defined below:


     R   =  the cost of equity capital


     PO  =  the current share price of the firm's common stock


     E^  =  the expected earnings per share during the


            next year


     D^  =  the expected dividends per share during the


            next year
                           4-2

-------
     1^  -  the expected equity investment per share during



            the next year  (i.e., retained earnings)



     g   -  the expected growth rate of earnings and dividends



     r   =  the rate of return on reinvested earnings



     T   =  the number of years the firm is expected to have



            "real" growth opportunities (i.e., r ^= R)





These models are typically used to produce estimates of the



cost of equity for individual firms.  However, the market's



expectations for the various variables required by the



models cannot be precisely estimated using simply historical



data.  Thus, the models will estimate equity costs with error.



But, as described in Part 2, the combined estimates of models 1



and 2, and the estimates of model 3 should be reasonably



unbiased (if noisy") proxies for the true costs.



     If all of the firms in the data sample had the' same equity



risk, it would be a straightforward matter to estimate the cost



of equity capital.  The optimal estimate would be a weighted



average of the individual values; individual company estimates



with lower measurement error would be weighted more heavily in




the average cost figure.



     Unfortunately, the samples do not have the same risk.



Sample industries cover a wide range of equity risks.  Even



within industries the companies differ significantly in risk.



What is needed is an estimation procedure that explicitly



allows for differences in company risk.  The risk-return theory
                           4-3

-------
described in Part 3 provides a basis for such a procedure.



The Capital Asset Pricing Model (CAPM)  specifies a relationship



between capital costs and equity risk,  as measured by beta:





          R  =  RF  +  e(Rm - RF)                        (3-3)




where



     R  =  the cost of equity capital (i.e., the required or



           expected rate of return on equity)



     3  =  the beta value for the  firm's stock



     R  = the expected rate of return on the market
      m         r


     Rp = the risk-free rate





A generalization of this model (the two-factor model) was



described in Part 3 as well (see Equation (3-4)).   Both models



hypothesize a linear relationship  between the cost of capital



(R) and risk (B).



     It is not assumed in this study that the CAPM is empirically



valid.  The tests of the model summarized in Part  2 indicate



that the slope of the actual risk-return line tends to be flatter



than that predicted by the CAPM.   However, the linearity of the



risk-return relationship has been  strongly established in several



studies.  In this research this result  is used.   That is, the



relationship between the cost of capital and beta  is assumed to



be given by



          R  =  a  +  b(B)                              (4-1)
                           4-4

-------
where a and b are constants.  Comparison of Equations  (3-3) and


(4-1) shows that if the CAPM was empirically valid, then the


estimated values of a and b should approximate the risk-free


rate (Rp) and the market risk premium  (R    Rp) respectively.




(b)  Estimation Equation (1 5)


     The risk-return relationship  (Equation  (4-1)) provides no


insight as to how R should be estimated.  Procedures for


estimating R for individual companies  are given by the three


cost-of-capital models.  Thus, combining Equation  (4-1) with


the three models will result in estimation equations in which


all of the variables are directly  observable or estimable.


Each of these equations will be dealt  with in  turn.


     1.   Perpetual-Growth Estimation  Equation  (Model  1)


           'D-,
           =±  +  g    =  a  +  b(B-)   +  e-             (4-2)
            0      Jj              3       ]



                                  j = 1,  ...  ,  n



               The j subscript designates the  company.   The


          regression coefficients  are  estimated cross  sectionally


          using "point-in-time" estimates for  the  n  sample  firms.


               The e. term represents  the measurement  error


          resulting from the use  of Equation  (2-8) to  estimate


          RT.  The e- is the difference between the  true
           J        3
                            4-5

-------
     (unobservable)  cost of capital and the estimated

                               2
     value from Equation (2-8).

          Since the  variables in Equation (4-2) are


     estimates  of the "true" values,  it is common practice


     to put hats (")  over them to so  indicate (e.g., 3-).


     This has not been done, however,  for reasons of


     notational simplicity.


2.    No-Growth  Estimation Equation (Model 2)
      P
       o
b(B.j)  +  e.j                   (4-3)
                          j  =  1,  ...,  N



          For Models  1  and 2,  the  estimated cost of capital

                            ^    /\  ^         ^     ^
     for firm j  is  given by  a  +  b(3-)  where a and b are


     the estimated  values for  a  and b  resulting from


     cross-sectional  regression  analysis for a specified


     date (e.g.,  December 1974).  (The  cross-sectional


     procedures  are described  in subsection (d).)


3.    Finite-Growth  Estimation  Equation (Model 5)


          The finite-growth  model  is more complicated and


     several  difficulties must be  resolved before it can


     be used  to  estimate R.  These involve the T parameter


     and the  recursive  nature  of Equation (2-12).


          The T  parameter measures the duration of real


     growth.   It is not directly observable and must be
                      4-6

-------
estimated from the regression analysis.  Conceivably,



every sample firm would have a different T value.



However, this would prohibit estimation of any T



values.  Another assumption would be to assume all



firms have the same T value.  But this would be



unrealistic.  A compromise assumption which has



considerable merit is to assume the T is reasonably



constant for firms in an industry group.  The data



base of the study consists of eight primary sample



groups  (see Section III for a description of the



data base used).   Thus, a duration parameter is



defined for each of the eight industries (T, ,



k = 1,  ... , 8).   Since the duration variables are



not directly observable (i.e., they must be estimated



from the regression analysis), they are replaced by



regression coefficients (C,  , k = 1, ... , 8).  These



coefficients will be estimated from the cross-sectional



regression along with a and b.



     Each firm belongs to only one industry.  To



separate the firms into groups, a series of eight



"dummy" variables (Z,, k = 1, ...  ,8) are defined.



For each sample firm only one of the Z, variables



will equal 1, the remainder will be zero.  The form



of the estimation equation is given by
                 4-7

-------
b(p.) +  I  C
        k=l
(r-R)  ^
                                  Z
                                   k
                              0,






                       j = 1, ... , N          (4-4)






Note that Equation (4-4) has nine independent



variables:  3- and eight growth terms.  For each



firm only the growth term corresponding to its



group membership will be non-zero.



     The next problem with the finite-growth model



is its recursive nature.  The term recursive refers



to the fact that R in Equation (2-12) is defined in



terms of itself.  As a result, the growth terms in



Equation (4-4) contain R.  While the other variables



in the growth terms (P~, r, I,)  can be either



observed or estimated prior to running the regression



analysis, R obviously cannot be;   R is the object of



the whole exercise.



     The solution is to perform the regression analysis



for Equation  (4-4) on an iterative basis.  That is,



initialize R in Equation (4-4) with a best guess,



estimate the a, b, and C^ (k = 1, ... , 8) parameters,



re-estimate R using Equation  (4-4) (i.e., R = a + b(3-))



and proceed as before.  The iterative process will



continue until the estimated parameters stabilize.



     The next question is how to initialize the



process;  what should be the first "best guess" for
         4-8

-------
          the R_. values?  The obvious answer is to initialize




          with the perpetual-growth (Equation  (2-8))  or no-



          growth (Equation  (2-10)) values.  If the iteration



          process is valid, it should not depend on which



          estimate is used  for initialization.   This  is the



          procedure used in this study.








(c)   Model 4—The Long-Run  Risk-Return Line



     It would be possible to estimate the cost of equity capital



directly from the Capital Asset Pricing Model  (CAPM)-   According



to the model (see Equation  (5-5)), the rate of return expected



by stockholders is the sum  of the risk-free rate (R,-)  plus a



risk premium that is proportional to the stock's beta.   However,



strict application of this  formula poses several difficulties.



First, the long-run relationship between risk  and return is



flatter than the CAPM predicts.  Second, what  is the  appropriate



risk-free rate?  Should we  use the rate on short-term or long-run



government bonds?  Third, what returns do investors expect on



the  market—i.e., what is R ?



     In view of these problems and particularly the first, it



would be unwise to rely solely on the CAPM to  estimate R.  Never-



theless, it would seem useful to consider the  implications of



the  long-run relationship between realized stock returns and risk



     The fourth estimation  equation is an extended version of



the  CAPM which permits a flatter risk-return line than the
                            4-9

-------
original model (and thus eliminating the first difficulty with
the CAPM).   It is given by

                         RF)   (Sj - 1) (1 - 6)  (Rm - RF)

Rearranging terms, we obtain

     R.,  -  [RF - (Rm - RF) (1 - 5)] + 6j(Rm - RF)-6
                                                         (4-5)
where 6 is the ratio of the actual to the CAPM-predicted slope
of the long-run risk-return line.  6 was estimated as follows.
The slope of the relationship between return and risk for all
stocks listed on the New York Stock Exchange between March
1931 and June 1970 was 0.827 percent per month.  The predicted
value from the CAPM was 1.171 percent per month.  The slope
attenuation function, 6, is the ratio of these two numbers, or
0.706.  In its predictions of R., this extended model will
use a relationship between return and risk which is consistent
with long-run experience, as opposed to the one predicted by
the CAPM.
     The second and third difficulties with the CAPM remain;
that is, what values should we use for Rp and Rm?  Unfortunately,
no complete solution exists, and one can only try to do  what
seems reasonable.  For Rp the 1-year government rate for the
12 months following the estimation date was used.  The expected
market return, Rm, was estimated by applying the perpetual-
growth model,  Equation (2-8), to the market index.  The  index
                            4-10

-------
used was the Standard and Poor's 500 Stock Composite Index.



Since the index represents the market as a whole, there is no



a priori reason to believe that Equation (2-8) would produce



a seriously biased estimate of R .    (The values used for the



1971 74 estimation equation are given in Table 4-8.j








 (d)  Cross-Sectional Regression Procedures



     Cross-sectional regression analysis was used to estimate



the coefficients of Equations  (4-2)  through  (4-4) for four



dates—December 1971 through December 1974.  This procedure



pools the data from the N sample firms  at  each date to estimate



the relationship between equity cost and risk existing at  that



time.



     Prior  to performing the cross - sectional regressions,



preliminary time series studies were performed for each firm



to estimate the necessary dependent  and independent variables



 (e.g., 3.,  g.).  The details of the  time series  variable



estimation  are described in Sections IV and  V.








Weighted Regression Procedures



     The three discounted cash  flow  (DCF)  cost-of-capital



models are, in effect, used to  prepare  preliminary  estimates



of the equity cost of  each sample  firm.  These  estimates  are



then combined with the beta measures in cross-sectional



Equations  (4-2) through  (4-4)  to produce new estimates  for R..
                            4-11

-------
(i.e., R. " a + b(3.))-   This procedure combines the informa-

tion in all N observations to produce more efficient estimates
   s\
of R. than can be obtained individually by the DCF models.

This is the rational for the cross-sectional procedure.

     The estimates of R. from the DCF models contain different

amounts of information.   For some companies the historical data

permit estimates of R. having relatively little uncertainty

(i.e., small measurement error).   For others the error will be

so large that estimates  of R. will convey little information

about the true value.

     Thus, when estimating the risk-return relationship at a
                  /\  /s      /".
given time (i.e., a, b,  and C,  for December 1974),  it would not
                           y\
be useful to give each DCF R. equal weight in the cross-sectional

regression.  It is preferable from the statistical  point of

view to weight each company estimate by its information content.

     The appropriate weighting factors are related  to the

standard deviations of the measurement errors of the DCF

estimates.  The larger the standard deviation, the  smaller

the amount of information about the true R. conveyed by the

estimate.  Thus, the weighting factors would be the reciprocal

of the standard errors.   Each of the three cross-sectional

equations would thus use different (but obvious highly related)

sets of weights.

     In this research the weights used for all three cross-

sectional equations are  the reciprocals of the standard error
                           4-12

-------
of past earnings growth.  This weight is used as a proxy for



the weight described above which is not observable.



     The standard error of past earnings growth is hypothesized



to be a good proxy for the unobservable measurement error



standard deviation.  The degree of confidence we can have in



individual DCF R. estimates depends on our ability to infer



the future from historical data.  In some cases, where past



trends are well defined, we can feel somewhat confidence



regarding our estimates.  However, where the historical pattern



is murky, the time-series estimates will tend to be unreliable



predictors of what the market expects.




     Further, since the valuation equations rely on the same



set of historical data for estimation, the measurement errors



of the R. estimates produced by Equations (2-8), (2-10), and



(2-12) will tend to be of comparable size.  Thus, as an approxi



mation, it is not unreasonable to consider the same set of



weights to be applicable for all three DCF estimates.  In this



study the same set of weights has been used for all three




cross-sectional regressions.



     Details on estimation of the weights are contained in




Section V(b).
Weighted Cross - Section Estimates of R.



     Estimates of R- based on the cross-sectional results were



prepared for each of the three estimation equations as follows:
                            4-13

-------
                                                         (4-6)

          /N     /N
where the a and b are regression estimates for a and b,  and

the £ superscript indicates the model number  (£ = 1, 2,  3).
                              /\
Additionally, for Model 3 the C,  estimates indicate the

duration of real growth for each of the eight industry groups

Details of the results are left to Section V.



(e)  Combining the Results of Models 1 through 4

     The next step is to combine the four estimates into a

single estimate.  This was done by average the four values.

An unweighted average was used since no compelling reason

existed for weighting the results of one model more than
        3                                        4
another.   The combined estimate, R., is given by
                                                        (4-7)
                        j  = 1, . . .  ,  N


     It now remains to estimate an error range for the combined
                       /\
equity cost estimates, R..   This  is accomplished by first

examining the relationship between the cost of equity capital

and beta produced when the four models are combined.  That is,
          R.   =  a + b^) + EJ                          (4-8)
                           4-14

-------
where the a and b terms are unweighted averages of the values

                                                        /N     X*.

from the four equations (see Table 4-9 for estimates of a and b)




Now, the uncertainty in the estimated cost derives from the




variation in the four estimates, plus the standard error of the




beta coefficients  (SE-g).  The standard error associated with




the equity cost estimates, a., is measured by
           a -
12

                  (4-9)
where sT, the variance of  the  e- variable, was estimated from


                     ~ £
the variance of  the  R. estimates  (I  =  1,  2,  3, 4).
                             4-15

-------
              III.   DEFINITION OF THE PRIMARY



                   AND SECONDARY SAMPLES
      The primary purpose of the study was to estimate the



costs of capital for six basic American industries:  pulp and



paper, chemicals, petroleum refining, iron and steel, non-



farrous metals, and utilities.



      The data base for the study was obtained from the Compustat



PDE tape.   This tape contained 314 firms in the six groups



listed above.   The data tape is organized along industry lines



as defined by the Standard Industry Codes (SIC).  The six groups



are spanned by eight two-digit SIC code groups.  The distribution



of firms in these two-digit industries is shown in Table 4-1.



      The 314 firms were divided into primary and secondary



samples.



      The primary sample consists of all companies with



sufficient historical data on the tape to permit inclusion in



the equity cross-sectional regressions.  To be included, a



company must have at least 7 years of earnings data on the



tape.  The primary sample included 208 of the 314 companies.



The distribution by group is shown in Table 4-1.



      The secondary sample is a further classification of the



314 firms into the original six groups plus 26 subgroups.



(The subgroup names are given in Table 4-3.)  The subgroups
                            4-16

-------
represent an attempt to build smaller homogeneous groups for



the purpose of later analysis.  The major stratifying factors



were: size of operation (petroleum refining), degree of



resource control (papers), product similarities  (chemicals,



steel, non-ferrous metals), and accounting convention (utilities)



The secondary sample included 207 firms.  A high degree of



overlap existed between the two samples, but several firms in



the secondary sample were not contained in the primary sample.



For these firms, cost of equity capital estimates were imputed



from the results of the primary sample by substituting their



estimated betas into Equation (4-8)
                             4-17

-------
                     TABLE 4-1

             DEFINITION OF SAMPLE SIZES
                NUMBER OF COMPANIES
GROUP NAME

MINING *
FOREST PRODUCTS **
PAPER **
CHEMICALS
REFINING
STEEL
NON-FERROUS *
UTILITIES

TOTAL
SIC
CODES

1000-
1031
2400
2600-
2650
2801
2803
2911-
2913
3310-
3317
3331
3350
4911-
4912


TOTAL
ON TAPE

35
21
49
54
43
50
27
35

314
PRIMARY
SAMPLE

18
9
31
36
34
28
17
35

208
SECONDARY
SAMPLE

6
5
49
36 ***
36
27 ***
13
35 ***

207
  *  Combined as Non-Ferrous Metals group in
     secondary sample.
 **  Combined as Pulp and Paper in secondary sample.
***  All companies in secondary sample are also in
     primary sample.
                       4-18

-------
             IV.  MEASUREMENT OF EQUITY RISK
(a J   Calculation of Betas



     The basic data for estimating common-stock betas are


monthly rates of return during the February 1962 through


December 1974 period.  The stock returns were computed from


the  Compustat PDE tape.



     The beta for a security is calculated by regressing the


monthly security risk premiums on the observed risk premiums


for  the market.  The risk premiums are formed by subtracting



the  30-day treasury bill rate from both the stock and market


returns.  It is customary to convert the rates of return to


risk premiums  to  remove a source of "noise" from the return


data.   The noise stems from the fact that observed returns


may  be higher in some years simply because the risk-free rates



of interest are higher.  Thus, an observed rate of return of


eight percent might be regarded as satisfactory in 1960, but


as a relatively low rate of return when interest rates were



at all-time highs in 1969.  The form of the estimation



equation is given by:
          r   =  a  +  Br .   +  e                       (4-101
           t              mt
                           t = 1, ...  ,  155
                          4-19

-------
where r. and r  . are the observed risk premiums on  the  stock
        t      mt


and market index respectively during month t.



     Betas were estimated for all stocks in the primary  and



secondary samples.  The market index used was  the Standard and



Poor's 500 Stock Composite Index  (with dividends reinvested).



The risk-free rate used to convert returns to  risk  premiums



was the 30-day treasury bill series.



     The data tape began in February 1962 and ended  in December



1974.   For stocks with complete histories on the tape,  the



full period was used in computing beta (155 months  of returns).



For non-complete companies, all available data was  used.  All



companies in the primary sample had at least 5 years of



monthly return data.



     Betas for groups and subgroups were computed by averaging



the betas for the companies in the group.  This results  in the



same beta as if the returns were first pooled  into  a group



portfolio and the portfolio beta computed as described  above.







     Beta Results



     The average betas and standard errors of beta  for the



eight primary groups are shown in Table 4-2 (first  two numerical



columns).   In addition,  the standard error of the mean beta



is shown in parentheses  under the mean.   The data show forest



product common stocks to be the most risky (mean beta =  1.37)
                          4-20

-------
and, as expected, utilities the least risky (mean beta = 0.70)



When comparing mean betas, the reader must keep the standard



errors in mind.  Differences in sample means can only be



considered statistically significant if large relative to the



standard errors of the means.



     Similar results for the 26 secondary sample subgroups are



given in Table 4-3   (first two numerical columns).  The



highest subgroup beta is 1.75 for the smallest category of



integrated petroleum refiners (10 -  30 thousand barrels per



day).  However, this group contains  only one company, and



the  standard error of the measured beta is large (0.26).



Hence, this result is suspect.  The  lowest risk subgroup is



flow through earnings public utilities with mean beta equal




to  0.68.
                           4-21

-------
                    TABLE 4-2
     STOCK RISK AND CAPITAL  STRUCTURE  DATA



            PRIMARY GROUP  AVERAGES
GROUP NAME

MINING (18)
FOREST PRODUCTS (9)
PAPER (31)
CHEMICALS (36)
REFINING (34)
STEEL (28)
NON-FERROUS (17)
UTILITIES (35)

TOTAL (208)
STOCK RISK
AVG.
BETA

0.94
(0.05)
1.37
(0.08)
0.97
(0.05)
1.22
(0.06)
1.06
(0.06)
1.00
(0.05)
1.07
(0.07)
0.70
(0.01)

1.01
(0.02)
AVG.
SE • 3

0.18
0.18
0.17
0.17
0.17
0.17
0.17
0.09

0.16
MARKET CAPITALIZATION
%
DEBT

10.3
22.0
20.6
19.9
14.6
25.5
24.1
44.1

23.6
\
LEASE

3.1
11.1
13.1
17. 2
19.4
10.1
11.2
0.0

11.1
%
PREF

1.2
2.0
2.7
2.6
2.6
3.1
0.7
9.6

3.6
%
COM.

85.4
65.0
63.6
60.4
63.4
61.3
64.4
46.3

61.7
(   )   =   Standard  error of mean beta.
                    4-22

-------
                            TABLE  4-3

                 STOCK RISK  AND CAPITAL STRUCTURE DATA

                       SECONDARY GROUP AVERAGES
GROUP
PULP
AND
PAPER
CHEMICALS
PETROLEUM
REFINING
IRON AND
STEEL
NON-
FERROUS
METALS
•UTILITIES
SUBGROUP
, LARGE MULTIPRODUCT
COMPANIES (S)
, MEDIUM WITH RESOURCE
Z CONTROL (1?)
, SMALL-MEDIUM W/0
•> RESOURCE CONTROL (10)
. FOREST PRODUCTS
* COMPANIES (5)
S CONVERTERS (12)
6 CHEMICALS — MAJOR (11)
, CHEMICALS —
INTERMED.(6)
„ CHEMICALS —
0 SPECIALTY (19)
Q INTEG. MAJORS (14)
* (200 + B/D)
ln INTEG. LARGE (S)
IU (200 + B/D)
,, INTEG. (3)
11 (100 - 200 B/D)
,, REFINERS (1)
(100 - 200 B/D)
., INTEG. .(2)
• (70 - 100 B/D)
, INTEG. (2)
14 (30 - 70 B/D)
., INTEG. CAN. (2)
li (30 - 70 B/D)
., REFINERS (2)
10 (30 - 70 B/D)
17 REFINERS (3)
l/ (10 - 30 B/D)
... INTEG. (1)
18 (10 - 30 B/D)
19 STEEL — MAJOR (7)
20 STEEL — MINOR (20)
21 PRIMARY COPPER (8)
,, PRIMARY LEAD AND
r-L ZINC (3)
23 PRIMARY ALUMINIUM (4)
24 SECONDARY SMELTING (4)
25 UTILITIES FLOW THRU -(IS)
26 UTILITIES .NORMALIZED (16)
STOCK RISK
AVG BETA
1.03
(0.06)
0.87
(0.06)
0.73
(0.15)
1.20
(0.05)
1.13
(0.10)
1.12
(0.04)
1.23
(0.08)
1.28-
(0.10)
0.91
(0.04)
o: 87
(0.06)
1.31
(0.06)
0.9.6
(NA)
1.69
• (NA)
1.33
(NA)
0.79
(NA)
1.24
(NA)
1.68
(0.26)
1.75
(NA)
0.94
(0.05)
1.02
(0.06)
1.12
(0.07)
1.22
(0.32)
1. 15
(0.13)
1.10
(0.11)
0.68
(0.03)
0. 72
(0. 04)
AVG SE-B
0.13'
0.17
0.29
0.23
0.31
0.11
0.19
0.19
0.11
0.17
0.18
0.25
0.36
0. 27
0.24
0.33
0.31
0.26
0.13
0. 18
0.15
0. 18
0.14
0. 26
0.09
0.09
MARKET CAPITALIZATION
\ DEBT
22.7
22.1
17. 5
20.7
19.1
18.1
21.8
20.3
14.2
14.0
16.7
32. 2
25.3
29.0
31.2
19.4
13.4
11.0
30.8
24.3
16.8
25.4
40. 4
32.6
45. 5
42. 5
% LEASE
11.7
13.9
13.6
7.2
20.2
14.8
18.9
17.9
24.0
22.7
24.6
7.2
41.2
11.8
14.0
18.0
12.2
5.9
10.3
10.0
3.8
4.6
16.1
16.9
0. 0
0.0
% PREF
2.6
3.3
2.1
2.9
2.3
1.3
6.1
2.2
3.2
4.2
1.4
5.5
3.6
0.6
12.5
0.0
2.7
6.8
2.7
3.4
0.8
6.3
2.8
1. 3
10.3
8.8
% COMMON
62.9
60.7
66.9
69.1
58.4
65.8
53.2
59.6
58.6
59.1
57.3
55.1
29.9
58.6
42.3
62.6
71.7
76.3
56.1
62.3
78.6
63.6
40. 7
49.1
44.2
48.7
(   )   •  Standard error of mean  beta.
NA   •  Not Available.
                                4-23

-------
       V. COST OF EQUITY CAPITAL: EMPIRICAL RESULTS
      This section describes the procedures used to estimate



the variables for the cross-section regressions (with the



exception of 3 which was dealt with in Section IV), summarizes



the regression equations, and presents the cost of equity



capital estimates.







(a)   Variable Estimation for Cross-Sectional Regression



      Models 1, 2, and 5



      Most of the variables required by estimation models 1, 2,



and 3 were estimated using trend projections.  The statement that



a variable is a trend value means that it is equal to the



estimated value for the current period derived from a



regression analysis of the variable against time.   This



smoothing is done to reduce potential errors in measurement.



The reasoning is that annual observations of a variable can



be viewed, to a  first  approximation, as observations about a



trend consisting of a true component and a random element.



If these random elements have zero mean and are serially



uncorrelated, use of the trend value of the variable, rather



than the current observed value, will tend to reduce errors



in measurement.   In computing the trend values, all available



data up to the estimation date are included (a maximum of 13



observations for 1974 estimates).
                          4-24

-------
     The variables to be estimated are: (i) the future growt <



rate of dividends, g; (ii) the dividend and earnings yields,




DT/PQ and E^/P^; (iii)  the rate of return on reinvested



earnings, r; and (iv) the investment ratio 1,/P^.








     i.   Growth Rate of Dividends (gj_



          What is required is an estimate of how the



market expects dividends per share will grow in the future.



However, we have no choice but to try to impute this figure



from past growth rates.  Since dividends tend to be smoothed



by management, it is customary to measure instead the growth



of past earnings.  This procedure will typically produce a



more reliable estimate of how dividends will grow in the



future.  The model of earning growth typically  used is given



by:








          Et  =  E61(l + g)1                            (4-11)








                           t = 1,  ...  , maximum 13






where E  is the earnings per share in year  1961 + t  (1962  is



the starting date on the PDE tape).  Taking  logarithms  of  both



sides results in a regression equation which  is linear  in  t.








          log Et  =  Y0  + Y!  • t                        (4-12)
                           4-25

-------
where YA = log Efi, and YI = log (1 + gj .  Liquation  (4-1.2)  was



fitted to the historical earnings data for each company and



estimates of the growth rates obtained.  In order to be



included in the primary sample, at least four positive annual



earnings observations were required prior to the estimation



date.  Years with negative earnings were deleted from the



regression analysis.



          In addition to the estimate of future growth rates,



the above regression provides another important estimate	the



standard error of the growth rate.  The standard error is a



measure of the amount of information in our forecasts of



future dividends.  A large standard error indicates that very



little can be learned from past growth about future growth.



Hence, a cost-of-capital estimate based on projection of past



trends may be subject to wide error.   Conversely, if the



standard error of the past growth rate is small, our cost-of-



capital estimate will likely be a reasonable proxy for the



market's required rate of return.   The standard error is



consequently used as  a weighting factor in the cross-sectional



regressions.   The application of these weights is discussed in



subsection (b) below.









     ii.  Dividend and Earnings Yields, (D^/P^) and (E-,/Pnj
                                          JL  U ™      J.	U ~-


          Respectively



          These values are the trend values of dividends and



earnings per share  divided by the price as of the estimation




                          4-26

-------
date.   For example, the 1974 cross - section regressions use




the trend value 1975 estimate for D and E divided by the



price per share as of December 31, 1974.








     iii.  The Rate of Return on Reinvested Earnings, r



          The only practical alternative for estimating r is



through the book rate of return figures.   The values used were



the trend values of earnings per share divided by the book



value per share at the beginning of the year.








     iv.  Investment Ratio,  (!-/?„)



          The values used were the trend values of the change



in book value per  share during the year to the stock price at



the beginning of the year.   The change in book value is



essentially the retained earnings during the year.








(b)   Estimation of Weights  for Cross-Sectional Regression



      Equations



      As described in Section  II, a weighted regression



procedure was used to estimate the coefficients of  Equations



(4-2) through  (4-4).  The weights are  the reciprocals  of  the



standard errors of the estimated  earnings growth  rates.   They



are estimated along with g  from Equation  (4-12).



      Exhibit 4-1  shows a plot of the  December  1974  weights



versus stock betas.  The weights  have  been normalized  (i.e.,
                            4-27

-------
         1.318    XSD«   3.325

ISTE9CE»T«   1.889    SUO'E"  -3.883
                                               J.330 .   YSO«   1.227    CORR,«  -3.234    N03S» 238

                                                 CELL SIZES.,  X«  0.0237     y.  a, 2322
oo
       9.2 a
        «.34  X
       6.33
       4. 55  i
       3.42 X
       2.?«
                         *
                       2  »•

                     »*»?*2
                           **        *
                          2*   *
                                                                                                                  X
                                                                                                                 ».
    1,29 x
                         »  * * 3*   22
                       2  « 4 ** 2*» 32
                  » *   * 3*.  233 *4
               *»   2 29* »»?»  3*»* 4
                                                3 * *   *
                                                32**    *3
                                                  24  «   3    «    *
                                                   3. * 2+  3* * *  *
                                                 «2   «   »»      2,
                                                                                                              SETA

-------
the sum of the weights is equal to the number of companies in

the primary sample, 208) to preserve the usual intuitive inter-

pretation of means and regression coefficients.



(c)   Weighted Regression Results

      The results of the cross-sectional regressions are

summarized in Tables 4-4 through 4-8.  The tables give the
                            XN  S\
estimated parameter values  (a, b) , t statistics for the

parameter estimates, and R  coefficients.  The regression

results are presented for year-end 1971 through 1974 estimation

dates, plus pooled results which combine data from the four

periods.



     i.   Model 1  (see Table 4-4)

          The regressions explain roughly 80 percent of the

variation in the raw Model  1 cost-of- capital estimates.  The

intercepts (a) tend to understate the risk-free rates, and

the slopes overstate the likely market risk premiums.  (See

the last two rows of Table  4-10 for an estimate of the

expected market return and  the actual risk-free rate.)



     ii.   Model 2  (see Table 4-5)

          The explanatory power of the Model 2 cross - sectional

regressions is somewhat less than for Model 1, averaging 66

percent over the four test  dates.  The intercepts, while some-
                          4-29

-------
                         TABLE 4-4






             WEIGHTED REGRESSION COEFFICIENTS



                          MODEL 1
D.
a  +  b
                                                j  = 1, ...,  208
YEAR

1971
1972
1973
1974

POOLED
INTERCEPT
A
a

1.27
1.01
0.28
1.17

0.93
t Stat.

2.5
2.0
0.5
1.4

2.7
SLOPE
s\
b

11.50
11.62
14.0
16.6

13.42
t Stat.

32.3
32.3
34.4
27.8

56.3
R2

0.84
0.84
0.85
0.79

0. 79
                           4-30

-------
            TABU- 4-5






WEIGHTED REGRESSION COEFFICIENTS




             MODEL 2
 a + b(8,) + y.
j  =  1,  ...  ,  201
YEAR

1971
1972
1973
1974

POOLED
INTERCEPT
/-\
a

2. 78
2.72
1. 83
4.11

2. 85
t Stat.

5.4
4.9
2. 7
3.5

6.2
SLOPE
^v
b

6.89
7.11
11.27
15. 72

10.25
t Stat.

19.2
18. 3
23. 5
19.2

31. 8
R2

0.64
0.62
0. 73
0.64

0. 55
               4-31

-------
what larger than for Model 1,  still tend to understate the

government bond rates.   The slopes still appear to overstate

the market risk premiums,  but  by less than for the Model 1

results.



     iii.  Model 3 (see  Table 4-6)

          The cross-sectional  estimation procedures for

Model 3 are more complicated,  as they involve successive

iterations with revised initial estimates of R..   The results

shown in Table 4-6 are  from the fourth iteration.  After four

iterations, the estimated parameters had not significantly

changed from the third  iteration, and the process was stopped.

Two sets of iterations  were carried out, one starting with the

DCF Model 1 cost-of-capital estimate, Equation (2-8), and the

other with the Model 2  estimate, Equation  (2-10).  The

iteration results are summarized in Table 4-7.  Table 4-7

shows how the average-cost-of- capital estimate (i.e., the
     /s
mean R.) changed from iteration to iteration.  Note that after

four iterations the average cost of capital is independent of

the starting value.
                          /S
           The intercept  (a) appears to reasonably approximate
                                         s\
the risk-free rate.  However,  the slope  (b) seems low relative

to a priori expectations about market risk premiums, particu-

larly in 1971 and 1972.  The percent of variation explained

is approximately 75 percent over the four test dates.
                            4-32

-------
                                    TABLE  4-6

                     WEIGHTED REGRESSION  RESULTS
                      MODEL 3
a  +  6(0.)  +
 8
 I
k=l
r - R*)
                                     I.
                                                                   j -  1	208
                                                                   Zk= 0 or  1
YEAR
1971
1972
1973
1974
POOLED
/\
a
(t)
5.24
[12. 2)
5.29
(11.2)
4.78
(7.5)
7.72
(5.8)
5. 24
(11.1)
b
CO
2.30
- (5.1)
2.35
(4.8)
6.15
(10.3)
10.43
(9.7)
5.70
(13.0)
DUMMY VARIABLE COEFFICIENTS (Ck)
MINE .
-5.22
(-1.7)
-5.24
(-1.7)
-2.53
(-1.0)
-1.82
(-0.8)
-0.55
(-0.4)
FOR
-3.86
(-1.1)
-2.44
(-0.9)
-0.82.
(-0.6)
-0.25
(-0.2)
0.16
(0.2)
PAPER
-4.19
(-1.4)'
-3.54
(-1.3)
-1.91
(-0.9)
-1.16
(-0.6)
0.01
(0.0)
CHEM.
-0.16
(-0.1)
-0.41
(-0.2)
-0.60
(0.0)
-1.01
(-0.5)
1.71
(1.4)
REF.
-4.11
(-3.0)
-3.14
(-2.0)
-1. 50
(-0.9)
0.01
(0.0)
0.20
(0.2)
STEEL
-2.95
(-1.1)
-3.50
(-1-4)
-0.25
(-0.1)
-0.86
(-0.5)
0. 34
(0.3)
NON-FER
-3.58
(-1.4)
-3.78
(-1.7)
-1.31
(-0.5)
-2.96
(-0.9)
-0.90
(-0.5)
UTIL.
-9.04
(-13.1)
-8.79
(-12.7)
-9.30
(-11.6)
-9.63
(-7.0)
-8.95
(-14.6)
R2
0.82
0.80
0.84
0.71
0.65

-------
                 TABLH 4-7
          MODEL 3 ITERATION SUMMARY
Average Cost of Equity Capital Estimate from
Model 3 Cross-Sectional Regression.
STARTING VALUE
FOR R.
FOR ITERATION 1

Dl
+ CT
po g
El
po
EST.
DATE

1971
1972
1973
1974
1971
1972
1973
1974
AVERAGE COST (%/YEAR)
ITERATION NUMBER
1

9.39
9.88
13.78
18.42
8.78
9.07
13.08
18.70
2

7.86
8.00
11.20
18.08
7.76
7.88
11.13
18.13
3

7.61
7.72
11. 01
18.24
7.60
7.70
11.00
18.24
4

7.57
7.67
10.99
18.25
7.57
7-67
10.99
18. 25
                    4-34

-------
     iv.  Model 4  (see Table  4-8)




          The parameters used  in Model  4 are  summarized  in




Table 4-8.  The model, Equation  (4-5),  along  with  the  estimates



of Rp and Rm were  used to produce  estimates of  the  cost  of



equity  capital for each firm  in the primary sample  for the



four test dates plus  the pooled interval.








     v.   Combination Model 1  through Model 4  (see  Table  4-9)




          Table 4-9  gives the  resulting relationship between



cost of equity capital and beta when the results of the  four



cross-sectional models were combined.




          Equation (4-8) and  Table 4-9  parameter estimates  were



used to compute the  final cost-of-equity capital estimates  for



the 208 firms in the  primary  sample.  Additionally, Equation  (4-8)



was used to compute  the equity capital  costs  for firms in the



secondary sample that were not included in  the  primary sample.








(d)  The Cost of Equity Capital:   Results



     The estimated costs of equity capital  for  the  eight



primary sample groups are given in Table 4-10.  The cost  esti



mates for the 208  firms in the sample were  computed from  the



regression  results for Equation (4-8)  which  are summarized in




Table  4-9.   The  group estimates are unweighted  averages  of



the results for the stocks in  the  groups.   In  addition,
                         4-35

-------
                   TABU:  4-8




            PARAMETERS FOR MODEL 4
 R.
RT
                 m
(3j    1)  (1  -  6)  (Rj,
  6  =
Ratio of actual to predicted slope of



return-beta line in CAPM tests



0.706  (January 31   June 1970)
YEAR

1971
1972
1973
1974

POOLED
EXPECTED MARKET
RETURN (%/YR)
R *
m

13.70
13.05
14.14
17.14

14.51
EXPECTED RISK-FREE
RATE (%/YR)
D **
KF

4.35
5.62
7. 21
7.01

6.05
     D.
             for the Standard and Poor's 500 Stock
    Composite Index.






**  Twelve-month treasury bills, from January.



    Source:  Solomon Brothers
                      4-36

-------
                 TABLE 4-9






RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN COST OF EQUITY CAPITAL




     AND BETA RESULTING FROM COMBINING




            MODELS 1 THROUGH 4
            + b(B-)
          Imputed risk-free rate
          Expected risk premium on market (R  - Rp]
YEAR

1971
1972
1973
1974

POOLED
INTERCEPT
a = (RF)

4.11
4. 22
4.05
5.76

4. 41
SLOPE
b E (Rm - RF)

6.81
6.57
9.07
12.45

8. 83
                   4-37

-------
                                   TABLE 4-10
           COST OF EQUITY CAPITAL (% PER YEAR): YEAR END 1971 - 1974




                                PRIMARY GROUPS
GROUP NAME

MINING (18)
FOREST PR. (9)
PAPER (31)
CHEMICALS (36)
REFINING (34)
STEEL (28)
NON-FER. (17)
UTILITIES (35)
TOTAL (208)

EXPECTED MKT.
RETURN
12-MO. RISK-
FREE RATE
SIC
CODES

1000-
1031
2400
2600-
2650
2801-
2803
2911-
2913
3310-
3317
3331-
3350
4911-
4912




BETA
(62-74)

0.94
(0.05)
1.37
(0.08)
0.97
(0.06)
1.22
(0.06)
1.06
(0.06)
1.00
(0.05)
1.07
(0.07)
0. 70
(0.02)
1.01
(0.02)

1.0
0.0
YR END 1971
COST

10. 5
13.4
10.7
12.4
11.4
10.9
11.4
8.9
11.0

10.9
ERROR

1. 8
2.8
1.9
2.3
2.0
1.9
2.1
1.4
1.8

1.8
4. 35
YR END 1972
COST

10.4
13.2
10.6
12.2
11.2
10.8
11.2
8. 8
10.9

10.8
ERROR

1. 7
2.6
1. 7
2.1
1. 9
1. 7
2.0
1.3
1.6

1.6
5.62
YR END 1973
COST

12.6
16.5
12.9
15.1
13.7
13.1
13.7
10.4
13. 2

13.1
7.21
ERROR

1.2
1.9
1.2
1.5
1.4
1.2
1.5
1.1
1.2

1. 2

YR END 1974
COST

17.5
22.8
17.8
21.0
19.0
18. 2
19.1
14.5
18.3

18. 2
ERROR

1.0
1.9
1.0
1.4
1.2
1.0
1.3
0.8
1.0

1.0
7.01
POOLED
(71-74)
COST

12. 7
16.5
13.0
15.2
13.8
13.2
13.8
10.6
13.3

13. 2
ERROR

1. 2
1.9
1. 2
1.5
1.4
1.2
1.5
1.0
1.2

1. 2
6.05
(Standard Error of Mean)

-------
Table 4-10 gives the error ranges associated with the group



means.  The error ranges for the individual companies and



groups were computed using Equation (4-9).




     The last two rows of Table 4-10 give the expected market



return and risk-free rate as of the end of the test year.



The market return, having been produced from Equation (4-8)



with beta equal to 1-0, is consistent with the industry costs



of capital by construction.  The risk-free rates, however,



are independent and are measured by the 12-month treasury bill



rates.  These values are all substantially less than the



expected market returns, as would be expected.



     The results for the pooled interval are shown graphically



in Exhibits 4-2 and 4-3.  Exhibit 4-2 shows the estimates for



the 208 firms versus their beta coefficients.  Since the



combined equity estimates were produced from Equation (4-8),



the resulting scattergram is a straight line as shown.  The



error ranges in Exhibit 4-3 show a more complex pattern.  the



error ranges tend to decrease as beta moves from 0 to 1, and



they increase sharply.  Firms with the highest betas tend to



have the highest standard errors of beta and hence larger




error ranges.
                         4-39

-------
X1E»N«   1,313    XSO*   3.325    YME»M«  13.323    YSD»   2.875    CORR,"   1.300    NOSSi  208

INTERCE»T»   a.425    StO?E»   8.825          CELL SIZES,.   X«  0.0237     r»   0.464B

    AE3»

   27.82 X	*	*"	*	*	*	*
   25.53 X
   23,13 X
   20.85 X                                                                                                    ]
         •                                                              * 0                                   <

                                                                     2
         •                                                       *                                            ,
   16.53 X                                                      02                                            ]
                                                              02
                                                            2
                                                         32
                                                      .4.
   IS.23 X                                          .40                                                       ;
                                                  22
                                               48,
                                             343
                                           454
   13.33 X                               583
                                       M3
                                     X5
                                  545
                                572
   11,55 X                    46
                            9*
                       -  *53
                       S3*
                     222
    9,23 /         »5
                  3
               2.
         •
         -2.  ,                                       ,

          ••••*••• 5t 535J"" 3, 7721*'" i.339i" "*i. 2491 "" 1 . 4831 ""'1°. 7231* "" I . 9571*'" 2.1 94l" ' " 2?43i 1* ' "l!
                                                                                                          BETA
                       Exhibit  4-2.   Pooled estimated cost of equity  capital  versus  beta.

-------
         1.313    X3D»   3.323    VMEAV»   2,215    ySO»   3,768    CORR."   ?.727     N03S* 288

INTERCEPT"   3.^83    SLO"E«   1.714          CEtL SIZES..  X"  0.0237      Y»   3.1322
    7,33
    6,57 X
    6.31 X
    3,35 X
                                                                                                              X
                                                                                                              9
                                                                                                             I*
    4,55 X
    4,33 X
    3,37 x
    2,73
                                     00

                                      3
                       3      323
                    3      33 0
                        .   ,    2 .
                             0
                            3 .
     >,a«
               *  *»»*
 2     .        ,,  2 ,3 ,

       2  V.    2])*1
*  *»»»  *2*33 642*2
 t   *2****»233
                       3223 3*23222
                  3,5351    3.7721    1,3391    1,2451    1,4831    1.7231    1.9571    2.1941    2.4311    2.9881
                            __                                                                            SETA
                          Exhibit 4-3.  Error range for pooled equity estimate versus beta.

-------
        VI.  THE WEIGHTED AVERAGE COST OF CAPITAL:

                    EMPIRICAL RESULTS




     Section VI describes the methods used to estimate

the cost of debt and preferred stock capital for sample

firms, to compute the market value proportions of the firms'

capital structures, and to compute the weighted average

costs of capital.   Empirical results are presented for the

8 primary and 26 secondary groups .




(a)  The Cost of Debt and Preferred Stock Capital

     The cost of debt capital to a firm is simply the yield

to maturity on its outstanding debt.   This assumes,  of course,

that the firm would be able to borrow additional debt capital

at this rate.

     It is a fairly straightforward matter to compute the

yield to maturity on any bond which is traded on an  exchange.

For example, assume a bond has a market value Vn , principal

value P, maturity date T years in the future, and annual

interest payments of C dollars per year.  Then the yield to

maturity, i, is found by solving the equation
                  T
          VQ  =   I    - - - F  +  - ? - f            (4-13)
           U     t=l   (1 + i)t(     (1 + i)1
In principal, this calculation could be performed for each
                           4-42

-------
bond issue and firm in our sample.  But the data collection

requirements of this approach make it impractical.

     A second approach would be to use the embedded debt cost

to the firm.  Embedded debt costs (^.e., interest paid

divided by the book value of debt) are available in machine-
                                                      y
readable form on the Compustat Annual Industrial Tape.   But

these debt costs will understate the cost of debt capital

since most corporate debt has been issued in times  of lower

interest rates (and hence the market values of debt outstanding

are less than the book values).


     The approach used in this study is midway between these

extremes.  An aggregate bond risk rating was prepared for each

sample firm as of the years ending 1971 through 1974.  The bond


ratings were obtained from the January issues of the Standard

and Poor's Bond Guides.  The S^P bond risk ratings  ranged

from AAA (the highest quality) to BB (the lowest quality) for

bonds of the sample firms.  When a firm had two or  more bond

issues with different S§P ratings (e.g., A and BBB), a weighted

rating was constructed based on the relative amount of the

bonds outstanding.  When a firm's bonds were not rated by

Standard and Poors, they were assigned the average rating of


firms in their primary group.  For example, a paper company

with unrated bonds would be assigned the rating of the average

of paper companies with ratings available.

     Once a bond risk rating was assigned to each sample firm,


the cost of debt capital was then given by the yield to
                            4-43

-------
maturity on the corresponding Standard and Poor's Bond Index.



For example, a utility with an AA risk rating was assigned



the current yield on the S^P AA public utility index.  When



a firm had a composite bond risk index, a composite bond



yield was computed using the same proportions.



     The advantages of this approach are that it is feasible



to produce statiscally unbiased estimates of debt capital



costs without an enormous effort.  The degree of approximation



is substantially lessened as we shift our attention to groups



of firms.



     For preferred stock, a similar process was contemplated.



However, since preferred stock is a relatively insignificant



portion of the capital structure of all the industry groups



with the exception of utilities, the significant effort



required would have borne small return.  Further, most of



the issues tend to be of high grade, particularly in the case



of public utilities.   Thus, for preferred stock a simpler



approach was used.  An index of yields on high-grade corporate



and public utility stocks was used to measure the current



market costs of preferred stock for all firms.








(b)  The Capital Structure Proportions



     Computing the proportions of various types of financing



in the firm's capital structure would be relatively simple



if market values were available for each type of capital.



But this is not the case.
                         4-44

-------
     The Compustat Annual Industrial Tape, which provides the

data base for the capital structure calculations, has market

values only for the common equity portion (number of shares

outstanding time price per share).    The tape contains book

values for debt and preferred stock.  The problem is to

convert these latter figures to market values.

     The market values corresponding to the book values were

estimated by using the relationship between the embedded

financing cost and the current cost, as determined in Section

Vl-a.  A factor was computed for each firm and type of financing

which converted the book values to estimated market values.

The factor, F, is given by



          F  -   I    —*-^  +  -i^             (4-14)
                t=l   (1 + i)r      (1 + i)1


where d is the embedded debt cost per dollar of book debt,

T is average maturity of the firm's debt, and i is the current

cost of capital.   For preferred stock, T is typically infinite;

for bonds we used the average maturity of all outstanding

corporate bonds (about 11 years).  This procedure is again

statistically unbiased and will  produce  better  estimates  for

groups  rather than individual  stocks.

     Another thorny problem involves the question of leases.

Leases provide an alternative form of debt financing.  As  such,
                          4-45

-------
they should be capitalized and considered as an integral part



of the debt structure of the firm.  This was done in the study



by assuming that current lease payments would continue



indefinitely, and then capitalizing these payments at the cost



of debt capital.  This was done for each of the four test years



for every sample firm with lease payments.



     The capital structure proportions were computed for each



firm in the primary and secondary samples for each of the four



test years.   Additionally, a pooled value was computed for



each firm by averaging the four annual values.   These pooled



values are shown in Table 4-2 for the 8 primary group averages,



and in Table 4-3 for the 26 secondary subgroup averages  (last



four columns).







(c)  The Weighted Average Cost of Capital

                                        I

     The groundwork has now been fully laid for the  calculation



of the weighted average cost of capital, which we have designated



as p (the }  subscripts denoting the firm number have been deleted



for ease of exposition).   For each firm, the formula for p*, as



given in Part 3 is
     n * =  in    T1  — + i fl    T1    + V  r -i- P ^
     P     i U    i J  v + i U    ! '  v    p ?   R V'
(See Part 2, Equation (2-27) for definition of symbols.)
                            4-46

-------
     The cost of equity capital R was measured in Section V;



the remaining variables were estimates, as previously discussed



in this section.




     Further, we can estimate an error range for the weighted



average cost of capital estimates.  The major source of error



in these estimates is the error of the cost of equity



estimates.  The errors associated with estimation of the other



variables in the p*formula are relatively smaller, and tend



to wash out as we shift our attention to groups of stocks.



The error range for a (which we shall designate as a^) is



given by
                                                        (4-15)
where a is the error range for the cost of equity capital



(see Equation (4-9)).



     The empirical results are presented in Tables 4-11 and 4-13



Table 4-11 presents the cost estimates and error ranges for the



eight primary sample groups.  Table 4-13 (first four numerical



columns) gives the weighted average cost estimates for the



26 secondary subgroups.



     The pooled total cost estimates for the 208




primary sample firms are plotted versus their common stock



betas in Exhibit 4-4.  The weighted cost estimates tend to
                          4-47

-------
                              TABLE 4-11
WEIGHTED AVERAGE COST OF CAPITAL (% PER YEAR): YEAR END 1971 - 1974




                           PRIMARY GROUPS
GROUP NAME

MINING (18)
FOREST PR. (9)
PAPER (31)
CHEMICALS (36)
REFINING (34)
STEEL (28)
NON-FER. (17)
UTILITIES (35)
TOTAL (208)

EXPECTED MKT.
RETURN
12-MO. RISK-
FREE RATE
SIC
CODE

1000-
1031
2400
2600-
2650
2801-
2803
2911-
2913
3310-
3317
3331-
3350
4911-
4912




MKT VALUE
DEBT/
TOT. ASSETS

13.4
33.0
33.7
37.0
34.0
35.6
35.2
44.1
34.7



YR END 1971
COST

9.3
10.1
8.1
9.1
8.4
8.1
8.4
6. 5
8.3

10.9
ERROR

1.5
1.8
1.2
1.4
1.3
1.1
1.3
0. 7
1. 2

1.8
4.35
YR END 1972
COST

9.3
9.8
8.2
9.0
8.5
8.2
8.1
6.3
8.2

10.8
ERROR

1.4
1.7
1.1
1.3
1.2
1.1
1. 2
0.6
1.1

1.6
5.62
YR END 1973
COST

11.2
11. 7
9.3
10.1
10.3
9.6
9.4
6.8
9. 5

13. 1
ERROR

1.0
1.2
0.7
0. 8
0.9
0.7
0.8
0.4
0.8

1. 2
7.21
YR END 1974
COST

15.4
15. 8
12. 5
13. 5
13.9
12.8
12.7
8. 7
12.7

18. 2
ERROR

0.8
1. 2
0.6
0. 8
0.8
0.6
0.8
0.3
0.7

1.0
7.01
POOLED
f"l— 4)
COST

11. 5
1 2 . 0
9. 8
10. S
10. :
9. &
10. 2
" . 5
q _ c
ERROR

1.0
1. 2
1
0.8
i
; 0.9
\
0. 9
' 0.8
0.9
i
0. 5
"0.8

13 2
1. 2
6.05

-------
XHCAN*    1.313     X30'    3.33S     V M E 4 N •    S.S82    V3D»   2 . «< 4 3    CORR.«   3.^17     N03S»  Z38

INTERCEPT-   4.445    sto»E«    5.332          CELL SIZES..  x«  0,0237      y»   3.2833

    TC.B
          	*	*	1*	*..'.	*'	*.,'.....*'.	*	*.,'..'.....*
   18.53 X                                                        *                                             X
         •                                                                                                     *•
         *                                                                                                      •
                                                                                                                a

   17,15 X                                                            *                                         J

                                                                                                                •
         •                                                 * *    »                                             •

   15.73 X.                                                            *                                         I
         '                                                      *                                               •

                                                                                                                •

   14.33 X                                       If                                                     X
                                                *     *                     *                                    •
         m                                                                                                      •
                                              *       *                                                          .
         •                                       **       *      *                                              .
   12,39 X                                 +             *         +                                             X
         %                              *****                                               „
         •                             *«?+*                                                    .
         •                           ******                                                                 .
         "                           ****•***•              4                                      «
   11.45X                      ******                                                          ),
         •                       *+   *   *     2                                                                 .
         •                          ******                                                            .
         *                  '*******                                                        ,
                            *    «  »2 *2      2,  **   *   *                                                       .
   13,32 X                  *          *^*vt        *                                        _             X
         -             *********            *                                                  »
                            *»         * 2 *                                                                       .
         •                       2******                                                           „
         »              *************                                                          ,
    8,53x           +t**2+****                                     *                         X.
         >*            *****2*«                                                          .
         •                 3**»»*                                                                 „
         •*           ***2*****            *                                                       .
         »            *******                 *                                                ,
    7.17 x           2*3**+                                                                       X
         «•         *     3*  *                                                                                     »
                   *3    *
         -*        2  *     3                                                                                     .
         -£»   +         *                                                                                       •
                   3.5351     3,7721     1,31331     1,2461     1,4331    1,7231    1,9571    2,l5«l     2,4Jlt     2.5531
                                                                                                            8ET4
                        Exhibit  4—4.  Pooled  estimated  total  cost of capital versus beta.

-------
increase with stock betas, but the correlation is less than



perfect, as would be expected.  The error ranges for these



cost estimates are shown in Exhibit 4-5.
                         4-50

-------
XMEHN"    1.313     XSO*    3.325     Y1E4>J»
INTERCEPT"   3.313    SUO»E«    1.356
                                        1.383    YSO»   3.660    CORR."   3.S21     N03S»  238

                                           CELL SIZES..  X«  0.0237     r»   3.3863
1,37
3,34 X
3,51 X
    3.Z3 X
                                                                                                           I-
                                                                                                            X
2,55 X
    2,22 X



    1,79 X


         •

    1,35 X



    0,92 X *

         *
         •Z
                                                    »**.*
                                             2     *          *
                         4   *

                             *   **                 *
                   *      4         *     *  2   *»       *
                        *             * *    V *    * *
                                   *  *

                 *  **           ***4***2     *
                    4     *     4     *****     *

               4     4   **    2*    **      ***.   2

                       t  *  4       t5  * ** *

                 3      *  *    *3  *  *** *2 »  **
                  **+        *  *   *  *         <•
               **    3   3  **  *   *  2  2*  *•           *
               *  2   *2*   *  ***  *2        »**
                  *  * *  4    *
                             .
                   3.5351     3,7721     1,3351     1.2061     1.4631    1.7201    1,9571    2; 1941

                         Exhibit 4-5.  Error range for pooled total cost estimate versus beta.
                                                                                                2,<13M     2.6681
                                                                                                        BET*

-------
         VII.   FORECASTING THJi WHIGHTED AVERAGE

                     COST OF CAPITAL



     Forecasting the manner in which capital costs are likely

to change over time is an extremely hazardous business.  Many

problems are involved, not the least of which is the need to

predict general movements in stock market prices.

     The total cost of capital for a firm is usually considered

as having three components:  the real rate of interest, an

inflation premium, and a risk premium.   That is,
Real Rate
    of
 Interest
      *  =     of       +   Inflation   +    Risk
                            Premium        Premium      ^     J
     The government bond rates,  and in particular the shorter

term rates, are usually assumed  to be estimates of the first

two components.  Thus, given forecasts of government bond

rates, we would have at least part of the problem solved.

     This leaves the really hard part	how to predict changes

in risk premiums over time.  There is no satisfactory way

to do this.  About all that can  be done is to assume that

future values will reflect an average of past risk premiums.

     Forecasts of future capital costs were prepared using

Equation (4-16) and are presented in Tables 4-12  (the 8 primary

groups) and 4-13 (the 26 secondary subgroups).  These forecasts

are conditional on the following assumptions:

     1.   The interest rate forecasts will reasonably

          reflect changes in the real rate of interest


                         4-52

-------
          and the inflation during the 1975-1984 period



          for which forecasts are being made.  The rate



          forecasts were for 12-month government bonds



          and were supplied by Chas<  Econometrics.



     2.    The risk premiums required by investors during



          the forecast period are equal to the average



          estimated premiums during the 1971 1974 period.



          These premiums are contained in the pooled cost



          estimates and are estimated by subtracting the



          12-month interest rates.  This assumption may



          not seem so unrealistic when market conditions



          during the 1971 1974 period are considered.  In



          the early years, market levels were high and



          risk premiums relatively low.  At the end of



          1974, market levels were low and observed risk



          premiums appeared to be at an all-time high.  Thus,



          the pooled risk premium estimates will reflect



          somewhat average conditions and provide a not-



          unrealistic basis for the forecasts.



     The reader should keep in mind that the forecasts given



in Tables 4-12 and 4-13 are not for 1-year periods but long-run



estimates as of the estimation date.  For example, the 12.41



forecast made for Forest Products as of December 31,  1975  (see




Table 4-12, column 1, row 2) is an estimate  of  the long-run



cost of capital.  It is not possible, given  the current  state



of finance theory, to say how this aggregate rate can be
                          4-53

-------
broken down into a series of annual discount rates (i.e., a



rate for 1975, for 1976, etc.).   This would require a term



structure theory for stock prices which, to date, has not



appeared.
                           4-54

-------
                                   TABLE  4-12





PROJECTED WEIGHTED AVERAGE  COST OF  CAPITAL  (% PER YEAR):  YEAR END 1975 - 1984




                               PRIMARY GROUPS
GROUP NAME
MINING (18)
FOREST PR. (9)
PAPER (31)
CHEMICALS (36)
REFINING (34)
STEEL (28)
NON-FER (17)
UTILITIES (35)
TOTAL (208)
EXPECTED MKT.
RETURN
EXPECTED RISK-
FREE RATE
1975
COST
11.8
12.4
10.1
11.1
10.5
10.2
10.5
7.7
10.2
13.6
ERROR
1.5
1.8
1.1
1.3
1.2
1.1
1.3
0.7
1.2

6.40
1976
COST
13.1
13.7
11.4
12.4
11.8
11.5
11.8
9.0
11.5
14.9
ERROR
1.8
2.2
1.4
1.6
1.5
1.3
1.6
0.8
1.4

7.71
1977
COST
13.2
13.8
11.5
12.5
11.9
11.6
11.9
9.1
11.6
15.0
ERROR
2.1
2.5
1.6
1.8
1.8
1.5
1.9
0.9
1.6

7.80
1978
COST
14.5
15.1
12.8
13.8
13.2
12.9
13.2
10.4
12.9
16.3
ERROR
2.3
2.8
1.7
2.0
2.0
1.7
2.1
1.1
1.8

9.10
1979
COST
14.8
15.4
13.1
14.1
13.8
13.2
13.5
10.7
13.2
16.6
ERROR
2.5
3.0
1.9
2.2
2.2
1.9
2.3
1.2
2.0

9.40
1980
COST
13.7
14.3
12.0
13.0
12.4
12.1
12.4
9.6
12.1
15.5
ERROR
2.7
3.3
2.1
2.4
2.3
2.0
2.5
1.3
2.2

8.30
1981
COST
12.5
13.1
10.8
11.8
11.2
10.9
11.2
8.4
10.9
14.3
ERROR
2.9
3.5
2.2
2.6
2.5
2.1
2.7
1.3
2.3

7.10
1982
COST
11.9
12.5
10.2
11.2
10.6
10.3
10.6
7.8
10.3
13.7
ERROR
3.1
3.7
2.3
2.7
2.6
2.3
2.8
1.4
2.5

6.50
1983
COST
12.1
12.6
10.4
11.4
10.8
10.4
10.8
7.9
10.5
13.8
ERROR
3.2
3.9
2.5
2.9
2.8
2.4
3.0
1.5
2.6

6.65
1984
COST
12..5
13.0
10,8
11.8
11.2
10.8
11.2
8.3
10.9
14.2
ERROR
3.4
4.1
2.6
3.0
2.9
2.5
3.1
1.6
2.7

7.05

-------
               TABLE 4-13
WEIGHTED AVERAGE COST OF CAPITAL  (* PER YEAR)



             SECONDARY GROUPS
GROUP
PULP
AND
PAPER
CHEMICALS
PETROLEUM
REFINING

SUBGROUP
, LARGE MULTI PRODUCT
COMPANIES (8)
7 MEDIUM WITH RESOURCE
CONTROL (19)
, SMALL-MEDIUM W/0
RESOURCE CONTROL (10)
. FOREST PRODUCTS
4 COMPANIES (5)
5 CONVERTERS (12)
6 CHEMICALS — MAJOR (11)
7 CHEMICALS — INTERMED.(6)
8 CHEMICALS — SPECIALTY (19
q INTEG. MAJORS (14)
y (200 + B/D)
,n INTEG. LARGE (5)
10 (200 + B/D)
,, INTEG. (3)
11 (100 - 200 B/D)
19 REFINERS (1)
L* (100 - 200 B/D)
,, INTEG. (2)
I'i (70 - 100 B/D)
INTEG. (2)
14 (.30 - 70 B/D)
EXPECTED MKT
RETURN
12-MO RISK-FREE
RATE
ESTIMATED
1971
8.3
7.4
7.2
9.7
8.5
9.1
8.3
9.3
7.4
7.5
8.6
7.7
7.2
9.0
10.9
4.4
1972
8.4
7.5
7.3
9.3
8.7
8.9
8.5
9.2
7.4
7.6
9.5
6.3
7.0
9.2
10.8
5.6
1973
10.0
8.6
8.0
11.4
8.7
10.7
9.4
10.0
9.2
9.1
11.4
8.2
8.61
10.7
13.1
7.2
1974
13. S
11.6
10.8
15.4
11.5
14.5
12.4
13.3
12.4
12.3
15.5
10.7
11.1
14.3
18.2
7.0
POOLED
10.1
9.0
8.7
11.7
10.0
10.7
10.2
11.0
8.9
8.9
10.8
9.0
8.3
11.2
13.2
6.1
PROJECTED
1975
10.4
9.3
9.0
12.0
10.4
11.1
10.5
11.4
9.3
9.3
11.1
9.3
8.7
11.6
13.6
6.4
1976
11.8
10.6
10.3
13.3
11.7
12.4
11.8
12.7
10.6
10.6
12.4
10.6
10.0
12.9
14.9
7.7
1977
11.8
10.7
10.4
13.4
11.8
12.5
.11.9
12.8
10.7
10.7
12.5
10.7
10.1
13.0
15.0
7.8
1978
13.1
12.0
11.7
14.7
13.1
13.8
13.2
14.1
12.0
12.0
13.8
12.0
11.4
14.3
16.3
9.1
1979
13.4
12.3
12.0
15.0
13.4
14.1
13.5
14.4
12.3
12.3
14.1
12.3
11.7
14.6
16.6
9.4
1980
12. 3
11.2
10.9
13.9
12.3
13.0
12.4
13.3
11.2
11.2
13.0
11.2
10.6
13.5
15.5
8.3
1981
11.1
10.0
9.7
12.7
11.1
11.8
11.2
12.1
10.0
10.0
11.8
10.0
9.4
12.3
14.3
7.1
1982
10.5
9.4
9.1
12.1
10.5.
11.2
10.6
11.5
9.4
9.4
11.2
9.4
8.8
11.7
13.7
6.S
1983
10.7
9.6
9.3
12.3
10.6
11.3
10.7
11.6
9.5
9.5
11.3
9.5
8.9
11.8
13.8
6.7
1984
11.1
10.0
9.7
12.7
11.0
11.7
11.1
12.0
9.9
9.9
11.7
9.9
9.3
12.2
14,2
7.1

-------
WEIGHTED AVERAGE COST OF CAPITAL (% PER YEAR)



              SECONDARY GROUPS
GROUP
PETROLEUM
REFINING
(CONT.)
IRON AND
STEEL
NON-
FERROUS
METALS
UTILITIES

SUBGROUP
.. INTEG. CAN. (2)
i:> (30 - 70 B/D)
,, REFINERS (2)
10 (.30 - 70 B/D)
17 REFINERS (3)
17 (10 - 30 B/D)
R INTEG. (1)
(10 - 30 B/D)
19 STEEL — MAJOR (7)
20 STEEL — MINOR (20)
21 PRIMARY COPPER (8)
PRIMARY LEAD AND
/Z ZINC (3)
7, PRIMARY
ALUMINIUM (4)
?, SECONDARY
Z4 SMELTING (4)
UTILITIES
5 FLOW THRU (19)
7fi UTILITIES
NORMALIZED (16)
EXPECTED MKT
RETURN
12-MO RISK-FREE
RATE
ESTIMATED
1971
6.3
8.8
11.8
13.6
7.3
8.3
9.6
8.7
6.5
7.1
6.3
6.7
10.9
4.4
1972
6.6
8.1
10.4
13.2
7.5
8.4
9-6
8.5
6.4
6.9
6.1
6.5
10.8
5.6
1973
7.8
10.3
12.7
16.5
8.8
9.8
11.8
10.2
8.1
8. 5
6.7
7.0
13.1
7.2
1974
10.3
13.9
17.1
22.5
11.8
13.1
16.1
13.7
10.6
11.3
8.4
9.0
18.2
7.0
POOLED
7. 5
11.0
14.4
16.3
9.0
10.1
12.0
10.5
8.2
9.0
7.1
7.6
13.2
6.1
PROJECTED
1975
7.7
11.4
14.7
16.7
9.3
10.4
12.4
10.9
8.6
9.3
7.5
8.0
13.6
• 6.4
1976
9.0
12.7
16.0
18.0
10.6
11.7
13.7
12.2
9.9
10. 7
8.8
9.3
14.9
7.7
1977
9.1
12.8
16.1
18.1
10.7
11.8
13.8
12.3
10.0
10.7
8.9
9.4
15.0
7.8
1978
10.4
14. 1
17.4
19.4
12.0
13.1
15.1
13.6
11.3
12.0
10.2
10.7
16.3
9.1
1979
10. 7
14.4
17. 7
19.7
12. 3
13.4
15.4
13.9
11.6
12.3
10.5
11.0
16.6
9.4
1980
9.6
13.3
16.6
18.6
11.2
12.3
14.3
12.8
10.5
11.2
9.4
9.9
15.5
8.3
1981
8.4
12.1
15.4
17.4
10.0
11.1
13.1
11.6
9.3
10.0
8.2
8.7
14.3
7.1
1982
7.8
11.5
14.8
16.8
9.4
10.5
12.5
11.0
8.7
9.4
7.6
8.1
13.7
6.5
1983
7.9
11.6
15.9
16.9
9.6
10.7
12.6
11.1
8.8
9.6
7.7
8.2
13.8
6.7
1984
8.3
12.0
16.3
17.3
10.0
11.1
13.0
11.5
9.2
10.0
8.1
8.6
14.2
7.1

-------
                  •'OOTNOTHS I;OU PART
1.    The numerical results presented in Part 4 are taken

     from an unpublished working paper by Professor Gerald

     A.  Pogue entitled "The implications of Modern Finance

     Theory for Estimating the Cost of Capital" [25],  dated

     August 1975.
     There  is  no need to  assume  that  the variances of e-
                                              /\
     are the same for all firms.   Indeed,  the R.  estimates

     from the  discounted  cash flow models  will convey

     different amounts of information about the true values,

     R..   This results in a heteroscedasticity problem which

     is  handled by using  weighted regression analysis (see

     Section II(d)).
     This  averaging procedure  will  reduce  the measurement
               s\
     error for R.  as long as  the  error variances of the four

     individual estimates are  roughly comparable in size and

     not perfectly correlated.   The optimal weighting scheme

     requires  knowledge  of the (unobservable) error covariable
                                    ~ I?
     matrix for the four estimates  (R., £  = 1,  2,  3,  4).

     With  this knowledge an optimal set of weights can be

     derived for  each company  to  minimize  the error of the

     combined  estimate R..


                          4-58

-------
4.   An alternative weighting procedure to  (1/4, 1/4, 1/4, 1/4)



     would recognize the complementary nature of estimates 1



     and 2 and give equal weight to estimates 3 and 4 and a



     combination of 1 and 2  (e.g., 1/6, 1/6, 1/3, 1/3).








5.   The PDE tape is produced by Investors Management



     Sciences, Inc.  (a subsidiary of Standard and Poor's



     Corporation).   The January 1975 version of the tape



     was used.  The tape contains monthly data for approxi



     mately 3,000 corporations for the 1962-1974 period.



     The data items include stock prices, dividends, earnings,



     and common stock book values.








6.   This effect is largely due to construction.  The data



     means for the four estimation equations tend to cluster



     near 3 = 1.0.   Thus the dispersion of the four R.



     estimates tends to increase as |B•   l| increases.








7.   The Compustat Annual Primary Industrial File contains



     balance sheet and income statement data for approxi



     mately 3,000 industrial and utility firms.  It is



     produced by Investors Management Sciences, Inc.,



     a subsidiary of the Standard and Poor's Corporation.








8.   An average of the four risk premiums is a more efficient



     estimator of future risk premiums than the last  (1974)
                          4-59

-------
observation.   The four observations can be viewed as



independent draws from the underlying risk premium



population.  Thus, the best predictor of the next



value is an average rather than the last value.
                      4-60

-------
ESTIMATION OF THE COST OF CAPITAL




FOR MAJOR UNITED STATES INDUSTRIES




   WITH APPLICATION TO POLLUTION-




        CONTROL INVESTMENTS
       PART  5.   APPLICATIONS
       Dr. Gerald A. Pogue



          4 Summit Drive



    Manhasset, New York 11030
          November 1975

-------
                    I.  INTRODUCTION
     The purpose of Part 5 is to show how the cost-of- capital



estimates developed in Part 4 can be used for making capital



budgeting decisions in practical situations.  Section II



reviews and extenda the capital budgeting procedures intro-



duced in Part 2.  Section III develops the basic structure for



an analytical framework which can be used for measuring the



financial impact on corporations of investments in pollution-



control devices.
                            5-1

-------
                 II.   CAPITAL BUDGETING
 (a)  The Weighted Average Cost of Capital

     In finance theory it is usually assumed that the goal

for financial decision-making is to increase the wealth of

corporate stockholders.  This results in the following decision

rule for evaluating corporate investment alternatives:  Accept

only projects which have positive net present values.  The

net present value (NPV) is the discounted sum of net project

cash flows (inflows minus outflows) .   The discount rate is the

weighted average cost of capital.
                   T      C
      NPV(p*)  =   I   - - ±—                           (5-1)
                  t=0  (1+*
where
     C   =  the expected net cash flow in year t

     p*  =  the weighted average cost of capital

     T   =  the economic lifetime of the project


The decision rule for corporate managers is


          Accept Project if NPV(p*) > 0                  (5-2)
                            5-2

-------
     The principal unknown in Equation (5-1) is the weighted



average cost of capital, p*   As discussed  in Part 2, p*



under certain circumstances can he estimated using a rule known



as the textbook formula.








          P*  =  i(l   Tc) • £  +  R  • |                 (5-3)



where



     i  =  the current interest rate  on the firm's bonds



     R  =  the cost of equity capital



     D  =  the market value of debt  (bonds  plus leases)



     E  =  the market value of equity




     T  =  the corporate tax rate



     V  =  D + E






Equation  (5-3) provides a  reasonable  estimate  of  the weighted



average cost of capital only under certain  conditions.  The



major requirements are  (1) the project does not change the



business risk of the  firm—it must be an average-risk invest-



ment, (2) the project does not shift  the firm's debt ratio—it



must be financed with the  same proportion of debt  and equity



as. the overall firm,  and  (3) the project must make a permanent



contribution to debt  capacity—the project  must be a perpetuity




and support perpetual debt.  (See Part 2, Section  IV-b for



discussion of these assumptions.)
     The Adjusted-Present-Value Approach



     An alternative to Equations  (5-1) and  (5-2)  is  the  adjusted



present-value  (APV) approach.   The adjusted present value  is




defined by

-------
                   T     C
          APV  =       ----- L     +  PVTS                  (.T. 4
where



     C   =  the expected net project cash flow in year t



            (same as in Equation (5-1))



      T  =  economic lifetime of the project (years)



   PVTS  =  the present value of the tax shield on



            debt supported by the project



     P0  =  the all-equity cost of capital — the cost of



            capital if the project were all-equity financed






The capital budgeting decision rule is





          Accept Project if APV  >  0                    (5-5)






The APV rule accomplishes in two parts what the NPV approach



attempts in one.  The APV is the sum of the project's net



present value under the assumption of all-equity financing,



plus the present value of the tax shield on debt.  Since both



components are dealt with separately, no restrictive assumptions



on the amount and duration of the project and debt cash flows



are required.   The NPV rule, on the other hand, attempts to deal



with both components at once  and results in a complicated



definition of p*.  Only under restrictive assumptions can p* be



simply estimated.  For example, p* can be estimated using the



textbook rule if the assumptions described in Section Il-a are



valid.
                            5-4

-------
     While the APV is a somewhat more complicated calculation



than the NPV, it can result in improved decision-making.



Compared with the textbook rule for estimating p*—and hence



NPV(p*)	the APV has three distinct advantages.   It allows



treatment of projects with different business risks, that is,



the all-equity rate p  can be tailored to the project risk.



Second, there is no need for the projects to be perpetuities.



Third, there is no requirement that the project be financed  in



a predetermined way, nor that the debt be permanent.



     One aspect of the formula left unresolved is the estimation



of the all-equity rate.  We shall deal with this matter in



subsection c.








Example



     Long Island Duck Farms  (LIDF) has the opportunity to invest



$100,000  (t = 0) and expects after-tax cash returns of $60,000



at t = 1 and $70,000 at t = 2.  The project will last for two



years  only.  The cost of capital assuming all-equity financing



is 121 (pnJ.  The borrowing rate  (i) is SI, and  the firm's  debt



ratio  for a  project of this type is 0.30.   (The target debt



ratio  is in book value terms.)  The problem  is to determine



if this project has a positive adjus-ted present  value.



     We start by computing the project's net present value  under



the base case assumptions  (i.e., all-equity  financing).
                             5-5

-------
                       2

                       I
                      t = 0
                        100,000  H.    >      +  70>QOO
                   =  $9,375




Next we determine the value of the tax shield associated with


the debt (PVTS).   The book value of the project at t = 0 is


$100,000.  Thus,  $30,000 extra debt can be issued at t = 0 ,


and $15,000 repaid at t = 1 (assuming straight-line deprecia-


tion of the asset).  Thus,
                   T iDn     T iD,
          PVTS  =  —	  +  —	-
                   0.5(0.08) (30,000)   +  0.5(0.08) (15,000)

                         1.08                 (1.08)2
                =  1,111  +  514




                =  $1,625



Thus, the APV of the project is $9,375 + $1,625 = $11,000.


     Suppose we wished to estimate the weighted average cost


of capital for this project such that the net present value
                            5-6

-------
as computed by liquation  (5-1) would also equal $11,000
direct way is to solve for p* from Equation  (5-1).
                                                         The
          11,000  =    100 000  +   60'"?0  +   70,000
                                    (lT^      (l+p*)2

Solving ,

          P*  =  11.61

Applying the textbook formula in a  straightforward (but

inappropriate) fashion yields p* =  10.2%.  If this estimate

were used along with Equation (5-1), the resulting NPV would

obviously be higher than 11,000.  This results because the

textbook rule assumes perpetual debt, and thus overstates the

present value of the two years of tax shields.  Further, the

textbook formula assumes the 0.30 debt ratio is in market terms,

not book  terms, and further overstates the value of debt.


(c)  The  All Equity Cost of Capital

     At this point it is reasonable to wonder why the textbook

formula for computing p* is used at all.  One answer is that

it provides a helpful starting point for estimating the all-equity

rate pQ.

     The  textbook formula can be used to estimate p* for the

firm as a whole.   Since the firm is assumed to have an  indefinite

life, and since debt ratios remain  reasonably constant, it fits

the textbook assumptions better than individual projects.
                            r _ 7
                            o  /

-------
     This rate can then be substituted into the MM  cost-of-



capital formula to obtain an estimate of p.. for the  firm  as  a



whole.  The process proceeds as follows:



     Step 1—Estimate the textbook p* for the overall  firm,







          P*  =  i^1   V £  +  R £




     Step 2—Substitute p* into the MM formula to obtain  p,,,







                        Tc
       • •  p,
                 (This pn is applicable only to average-risk




                 proj ects . )




     Step 3 — For projects satisfying the MM formula assumptions,




          use this rule to estimate their p?   (j denotes project)






          P]  =  P0(l   TcL1)                            (5-7)
where



     L-  =  the debt- financing ratio for project  j



This p* can now be substituted into Equation  (5-1]  to estimate



the NPV(p*) for project  j.



     For projects not satisfying the MM cost-of- capital rule,



use the APV approach.
                         C-t
                                   PVTS.                 (5-8)
                            5-

-------
Note that we have been careful only to consider average-risk



projects for which the pQ is applicable.  A thornier problem



arises when a project is of different riskiness.  It is then



necessary to estimate pQ.—the all-equity rate applicable to



project j.   There is no simple practical answer to this



problem.




     When a market risk measure  (beta) is available for the



project, then the p~. can be estimated using the procedures



and results of Part  4.  That is, given the beta of the project,



an estimate of its cost of capital can be estimated.  Beta



measures, however, are typically not available for individual



projects.  About the best that can be done is to use the



(unlevered) beta for the common  stock of a company whose



business risk resembles that of  the project.  For example, a



chemical firm contemplating investment in the paper industry



could use the average beta for a suitably chosen group of paper



companies as an estimate of the market risk of the project.



Given the risk estimate, the p~. follows as described in Part  4.



     If this procedure is used,  caution must be taken to ensure



that the betas used  are unlevered.  A company's beta reflects



not only its business risk but also its financial risk.  To



estimate  p •   we require the all-equity beta  (BQ) which reflects




only business risk.



     The all-equity beta can be  estimated from the firm's market
beta (3) and the market-debt - to-equity ratio  -
                                              D
as follows.
                            5-9

-------
                                §}
(5 - 9)
     When market risk measures are not available, a heuristic



solution is to position the risk of new projects relative to



the average risk. The PQ-'S for individual projects are then



subjectively increased or decreased from the average value.



For example, a firm might categorize its investments into



three categories—high, average, and low risk—and subjectively



adjust the p.. for the high and low groups.  While this approach



is not very satisfying, it is the one typically used in practice








Example



     Suppose a firm has a market debt ratio of 0.20 and can



borrow at 8 percent.   The management estimates investors'



required rate of return, R, at 12 percent.  Then by the textbook



formula






          P*  =  iCi - Tc) £  +  R|






              =  0.08 (0.50)(0.20)  +  (0.12) (0.80)





              =  0.104






This 10.4-percent rate would be the correct hurdle rate for



average-risk perpetual projects with debt financing ratios



of 0.20.
                            5-10

-------
     The MM formula can be used to estimate pn for the average



risk project






          o*  -  "of1   Tcf
                      0.104
                      075(0. 20)
              =  0.116






This is a starting point for using the MM formulas or the APV



approach for average-risk projects.
                            5-11

-------
          III.  MEASURING THE FINANCIAL IMPACT




       OF INVESTMENTS IN POLLUTION-CONTROL DEVICES
     Pollution-control requirements involve long-run sequences




of capital investments and annual operating expenses.  Conse-




quently, there is a need to measure the magnitude of these




requirements relative to the firm's ability to carry them out.




     Given the nature of pollution-control investments, their




imposition will tend to reduce the value of a firm's assets.




How significant is this reduction in value?  How much would the




return on other corporate assets have to be increased to offset




this decline?




     The purpose of this section is to introduce a framework




for analyzing these questions.  This framework will provide a




first step toward analyzing the financial impact on corporations




of required pollution-control investments.  It is not the




intention to provide a detailed analysis of such questions, but




to point the direction in which such an analysis might proceed.




Indeed, many significant questions are left unasked as well as




unanswered.








(a)  A Financial Impact Index




     Pollution-control programs require long-run expenditures




by corporations.  These include periodic investments in facilities




plus annual operating costs.  As with other investments, the
                            5-12

-------
current economic value of n pollution-control investment (PCI)



is the present value of  its future cash flows (i.e., the APV).



For PCI's, the present values are negative  (since all cash flows



are negative) and hence  they will be undertaken by corporations



only if required by law.



     A measure of the relative financial impact of a PCI is



obtained by comparing its present value to  the present value



of the firm's other assets.  The present value of the firm's



assets is given by the market value of the  firm (VR) , that is,



the market value of the  firm's equity and debt obligations



prior to adoption of the PCI   (Vr> = Dr> + EB).  The relative
                                 D    D     D


impact of the PCI can be measured by the ratio of the APV to



the value of the firm's  other assets.  The  ratio is designed



as the financial impact  index (FIT).
          FII  =                                         (5-10)
                    V
                     £>



where



      APV|  =  the absolute value of the  (negative) PCI-



               adjusted present value





Note that the value  of the firm after  adoption of  the PCI  (V^



will equal the prior  value VR plus  the APV  of the  investment.




     If the FII is small  (e.g., 0.02), then the  impact  of  the



PCI on the corporation would similarly be small.   However,  as



the FII increases, the ability of the  firm  to successfully



absorb the PCI will  diminish until  finally  bankruptcy occurs.
                            5-13

-------
Exactly when the critical value of the FII occurs is a difficult



question requiring further research.








(b)  The Risk and Financing of Pollution-Control Investments



     The riskiness and method of financing of pollution-control



investments will depend on case-by-case analysis.  However, it



is possible to define a set of boundary conditions which will



delineate the possibilities that will likely exist in practice.








The Risk of PCI's



     The maximum risk of a PCI is probably the risk of the



firm's other assets.   While it is possible the PCI risk would



be higher, it is unlikely.  It is more likely that the PCI



cash flows will not be more variable  or less predictable than



the firm's other operating cash flows.  To the extent that



pollution-control costs tend to vary  with the firm's business



activities, the PCI's will be of average risk.



     On the other hand, the minimum possible riskiness will



resemble the risk of the firm's debt  obligations.  Even if the



pollution-control costs were contractual, the firm can default



by going out of business.   Hence, the minimum risk can be no



less than that of the firm's debt service obligations.








The Financing of PCI's




     The typical PCI will have predominantly negative cash



flows (e.g., investment outlays, operating expenses, etc.).
                            5-14

-------
While there will be some favorable side effects (e.g., tax

savings from investment depreciation, sale value of biproducts

such as sulphuric acid, etc.), these will typically be

insufficient to produce either a positive net present value

for the PCI or  even a significant number of positive annual

cash flows.

     Given the above, the PCI's will have no inherent debt

capacity of their own.  In fact, a PCI will reduce the debt

capacity of the rest of the firm.  This follows because the

negative net present values of the PCI's will reduce the ability

of the overall firm to support debt service requirements.   Thus,

the PCI's have negative debt capacity.

     For example, a firm which has debt outstanding with a loan

covenant requiring maintenance of a certain debt coverage ratio

may well have to reduce its debt level given the reduction in

operating earnings caused by the PCI.

     If a PCI is partially or entirely financed by debt issues,

this is possible only because the firm has enough unused debt

capacity associated with its other assets  (even after the

reduction in aggregate debt capacity caused by the PCI) to

support the new debt.  We must be careful, however, not to

attribute the tax benefits of this new debt to the PCI.  The

firm could have obtained these benefits by using the  debt
                                  l
capacity to finance its other projects.
                           5-15

-------
     Consider now two limiting cases relating to the firm's



overall capital structure, all-equity financed and, the



situation where the firm has fully utilized the debt capacity



of its existing assets, maintaining a debt ratio equal to




(D/V).



     In the first case, the reduction in debt capacity caused



by adoption of the PCI will have no effect.  Since these firms



make no use of debt, the present value of tax savings on the



debt capacity reduction caused by the PCI (PVTS) has a zero



value.



     In the second case, the reduction in debt capacity will



result in a reduction in the value of the firm.   Assuming the



firm has fully utilized the debt capacity of its other assets,



the adoption of the PCI will require a reduction of the firm's



debt level.  This follows because, in order to maintain a target



debt ratio of, say, 30%, a reduction in the value of the firm's



assets due to the PCI will necessitate a reduction in debt



level in order to maintain the target debt ratio.   The present



value of the tax savings on the debt displaced by the PCI is



positive or, viewed from the point of view of the PCI,  the PVTS



of the PCI is negative.



     The matrix of possible risk and capital structures is



illustrated in Table 5-1.   Cases 1 and 2 assume average-risk



investments, Cases 3 and 4 assume "low risk".   To compute the
                           5-16

-------
                      TABLE 5-1




 POSSIBLE RISK AND CAPITAL STRUCTURE CONSIDERATIONS




          FOR POLLUTION-CONTROL INVESTMENTS
Investment
Risk

Average Risk
(Same as
Other Assets)
Low Risk
(Same as
Firm's Bonds)
Capital Structure of Firm
All Equity

Case 1
PCI
P0 = P0
PVTS = 0
Case 3
PCI
P0 = i
PVTS = 0
Equity $ Debt

Case 2
PCI
P0 = P0
PVTS < 0
Case 4
PCI
P0 = i
PVTS < 0
      =  all-equity rate for pollution-control investments






  pn  =  all-equity rate of firm's other assets






   i  =  interest rate on firm's bonds






PVTS  =  the present value of the tax shield on the




         PCI debt capacity
                          5-17

-------
APV's for these cases, we require estimates of the all-equity
                                                        PC I
financing rate.  In Cases 1 and 2 the all-equity rate, pQ '  ,
is  equal  to the  all-equity  rate for  the  firm as a whole
                   P
                  '0
                   PC I
In Cases 3 and 4, pn    is the rate of interest on the firm's
bonds.
     Cases 1 and 3 assume the firm is all-equity financed,
while Cases 2 and 4 assume the firm fully utilizes its debt
capacity, maintaining a target debt ratio equal to (D/V).
     It is not possible to further specify the nature of the
PCI APV's without further definition of the PCI cash flows.
If we assume, for example, an initial investment  I~ at t  = 0,
and a perpetual stream of annual after-tax payments -C beginning
at t =  1, then the general expression for the PCI APV is given
by

          APV  =  ~TCT     :0  +  PVTS                   (5-11)
                  P0
where
           PCI
          PQ    =  the all-equity rate for the PCI
            -C  =  the annual operating cost (after
                   corporate tax)
            IQ  =  the investment at t = 0
          PVTS  =  the present value of the tax savings on
                   the debt capacity reduction caused by the
                   PCI (zero for Cases 1 and 3)
                           5-1;

-------
     Assuming that perpetual debt has been issued by the i'i rm



in Cases 2 and 4, the present value of the tax savings on the



debt capacity reductions caused by a PCI is equal to  T -DPCI,



where TC is the corporate tax rate z id D    is the reduction



in debt capacity caused by the PCI.  In effect, if the firm



was making no other investments other than the PCI, it would


                     PCI
be forced to retire D    dollars of perpetual debt on acceptance



of the PCI.  In practice, however, firms will be carrying out



other investment and financing programs along with the pollution


                                             PCI
control requirements.  Rather than retiring D    dollars of



debt, the new financing mix would simply be changed to issue



more equity and less debt than otherwise.  The effect, however,



is the same.



     Calculation of the PVTS for the PCI's is complicated in



Cases 2 and 4 by the dependence of the reduction in debt



capacity on the (negative) value of the PCI, which in turn



depends on the present value of the tax savings.  This can be



more clearly seen from the following steps.


                                PCI
     From Equation  (5-4) the APV    is given by




          APVPCI  =  NPV(p0)  +  PVTS




     Assuming that all debt is perpetual,  and that the firm



plans to maintain the target debt ratio equal to  (D/V), the



adoption of the PCI would require that the debt  level be


            PfT
reduced by D    dollars, where
                            5-19

-------
          °
           PCI
 APV
    .PCI
(5-12)
The present value of the tax savings associated with this



reduction is given by





          PVTS  =  Tc[|] (APVPCI)                         (5-13)





Substituting from Equation (5-13) into Equation (5-4) we have




                                    F)
                  =  NPV(pQ)   +  Tc-H
or, rearranging terms,



             rPCI
          APV1
                      1-T •-
                      1  c V
   m  •  NPV(pQ)                  (5-14)
Thus, reduction in market value of the firm will increase with



increasing debt ratios.  Specific forms of Equation  (5-14) for



the four cases are given in Table 5-2.






(c)  The Offset Rate of Return



     How much would the rate of return on the firm's other



assets have to increase to offset the negative impact of the



PCI?  The effect would be offset when the increased present



value resulting from the increase in return was just equal to



the (absolute) value of the PCI APV.  That is,
          AAPV
              •FIRM
APV
   PCI
(5-15)
To further specialize Equation (5-15), further assumptions



regarding the firm's assets are required.
                           5-20

-------
             TABLE  5-2






ADJUSTED PRESENT VALUE FOR EXAMPLE




   POLLUTION-CONTROL INVESTMENT
Cash
Flow
.,0 L
Time 0 1
(Years)
-C -C
2 3
Case

Eq.
Eq.
Eq.
Eq.
1
(5-14a)
2
(5-14b)
3
(5-14c3
4
(5-14d)
Adjusted Present Value
(APV)

-c z
P0 0
1 I"'0 I 1
(i Vf) Lp° °J
i 0
1 r~c 1 1
KV?) Li :°J
                 5-21

-------
     Assume, for example, the market value of the firm's assets
is  V.  [prior to adoption of the PCI).  The assets generale ;
     B
                                                            a
perpetual after-tax return of r percent per year.  Also assume



the return can be increased by Ar percent per year;  hence, the



increased annual cash flow is Ar VR dollars per year.  Assume



further the firm will adjust its capital structure to maintain



its target debt ratio (and hence the appropriate discount rate



rate of p*) .
          Ar '  V7
             P*
                        APV
                           PCI
Therefore ,


                  APVPCI
          Ar  =  J	77	
                          •  p*

                    ¥B



or



          Ar  =  (FII) p*                                (5-16)



where



     p*  =  the (textbook)  weighted average cost of capital



Thus, given the above assumptions,  the necessary increase in



the return on the firm's other assets is equal to the financial



impact index (FII)  times the weighted average cost of capital.



(Note that for an all-equity financed firm, p* = p~ and hence



Ar =  (FII) pQ.)
                            5-22

-------
(d)   Example



      Consider three firms  (A, B, and C) with market values of



assets prior to adoption of PCI's (Vfi) of 1000, 500, and 100,



respectively.  Each firm generates a perpetual return on the



market value of its assets of 10 percent per year.  The



all-equity rate for average-risk projects is 10 percent, and



the firms can borrow at a 6-percent rate.  The corporate tax



rate  (TC is 50 percent.  The firms are assumed to be identical



except for the size of assets.



      Each firm is required to install a polution-control



device at t = 0.  The required investments are 100, 75, and 40



for the three firms respectively.  Annual operating costs are



10, 5, and 1.



      For each firm we will consider the implications of the



four cases defined in Table 5-1.  In Cases 1 and  3 we assume


                                              PCI
the PCI's to be of average risk.  Therefore, pQ   = 0.10.



In Cases 2 and 4 we assume the PCI's to be of minimal risk


                                              PCI
(same risk as the firm's bonds).  Therefore, PQ   = 0.06.



      In Cases 1 and 3 it is assumed that the three firms are



all-equity financed (and plan to remain so in the future).  Thus,



PVTS = 0 and p* = PO = 0.10.  In Cases 2 and 4 it is assumed



that the three firms have fully utilized all of the debt



capacity of existing assets.  Each firm has a market value



debt ratio (D/V) equal to 30 percent which will be maintained



after the PCI.   In order to achieve this, each firm will be
                            5-23

-------
required to retire debt equal to 30 percent of the  (negative)



market value of the PCI through new equity issues  'see



Equation (5-12)).  This is in addition to the equity issued



to finance the PCI initial investment (I~ dollars).  Each firm



has a weighted average cost of capital of 8.5 percent  p* = 0.08




      The results for the four cases and three firms ai-e



summarized in Table 5-3.   Row 7 of Table 5-3 gives the financial



impact index values;  row 9 gives the offset rates of return.



      While the numbers in the example were selected for



illustration only, the results clearly show the relationship



between the effect of pollution investments and the size cf



firm.   It seems fairly clear a small firm such as C would be



forced out of business, while the largest firm A would haie the



best chance of successfully absorbing the PCI.



      Note that the offset rates of return do not depend on the



capital structures of the firms (see row 9, Table 5-3).   1ven



though the initial impact of the PCI is more severe for the



debt firms (see row 7) due to the loss of valuable debt



capacity, it is exactly offset by the new debt capaciiy g-neiate



by the increased return (Ar) on the firm's other assets.   This,



of course,  assumes the offset returns can be achieved.   I  not,



the impact remains greater for the firms using debt.
                            5-24

-------
                                                                TABLE 5-3
                                          EXAMPLE:   THE IMPACT OF POLLUTION-CONTROL INVESTMENTS


                                                       ON FIRMS OF DIFFERENT  SIZE*


Market Value of Firm (VB)
PC Investment (T = 0}
PC Annual Cost (t = 1,»)
Base Case NPV
PVTS
APV = NPV + PVTS
Impact Index
Offset AR (1)
Offset Return (1)
Average-Risk Investment (Cases 1 and 2)
Case 1
All Equity
Firm A

1000
-100
-10
-200
0
-200
.200
2.0
.12. 0
Firm B

500
-75
r
-12S
0
-125
.250
2.5
12. S
Firm C

100
-40
-1
-SO
0
-50
.500
5.0
15.0
Case 2
30% Debt Ratio
Firm A

1000
-100
-10
-200
-35.3
-235.3
.235
2.0
12.0
Firm B

500
-75
-5
-125
-22.0
-147. 0
.294
2.5
12.5
Firm C

100
-40
-1
-50
-8.8
-58.8
. 588
5.0
15.0
Low-Risk Investment (Cases 3 and 4)
Case 3
All Equity
Firm A

1000
-100
-10
-266. 7
0
-166.7
.267
2.7
12.7
Firm B

500
-75
-5
-158.3
0
-158.3
.317
3.2
13.2
Firm C

100
-40
-1
-56.7
0
-56. 7
.567
5.7
15.7
Case 4
30% Debt Ratio
Firm A

1000
-100
-10
-266.7
-47.1
-313.7
.314
2.7
12.7
Firm B

500
-75
-5
-Io3.3
-27.9
-186.2
.372
3.2
13.2
Firm C

100
-40
-1
-56.7
-16.7
-66.7
.667
5.7
15.7
Ni
U1
           *  The numbers are chosen for illustrative purposes only.

-------
      The relationships between the impact index and size ar<



displayed in Figure 5-1.   As shown in Figure 5-1, the relation



ship is very dependent on both the risk of the PCI and the



firms'  capital structures.
                            5-26

-------
          \
           \
55
,50
            V!
\
1 !
1
!
; Pi


i




V
V _.|
\: '

\
ki



LOt C




: 1
CA^
1 1
CASE
:-GAS-£
CASE
p ft c r
un o t
i



•
F rr^
i
FOR



E , :
i 1

2 '
3





•FUJ'J
ACT 'i

TAE}L


1
' ,

i :/^v
' - H~V
1 ;uc
• i ' r*
i -^,
' •
i
i
U^Ei 5-1
ND6X 'VERSUS
i.
E 5-3 EXAHPL


iii i i
!RllSl4

EJRAGEJ .RlSKl
ErRA^GE; RfrSK
iJ ;RI:S|K

i/» _ i\ j. ^ r\ ,
i ; i
;


FIrtM SIZ

E
|


CAPITAL

ALL E
-|30« D
ALL E
1 Q r\ q/ n
1
i



E





STRUCTURE

QUITY;
EBT
QUITY
p n, T
.

.45
 35 h
 ,30
 .25
 ,20
             200

                                                             CASE 4
                                                             CASE  3
                                                             CASE  2
                                             800
1000
SIZE OF FIRM (VB)
                                      5-27

-------
             FOOTNOTES  FOR  PART  5
The adjusted-present-value approach to capital



budgeting was developed by Professor Stewart C. Myers



and is described in detail in [21],







See Hamada  [6], p. 20, Equations  15, 16, and  17.



The ratio of Equations  (15) and  (16) gives  (in  the



notation of this study)



               E
 J_

 Bo
                0
where E,-, is the total value of the unlevered equity,



E the levered equity.  By Equation (17)



     E,
      '0
       E  +  (1   Tc)D
or
-    =  1
E      L
                (1 - T )
                U        E
Thus, combining these two results,
     B
             (1
as given in Equation (5-9).
                     o

-------
                      REFERENCES








[1]      Beaver, W.,  and Manegold, J.,  "The Association




        Between Market-Determined rnd  Accounting-Determined




        Measures of Systematic Risk:  Some Further Evidence,"




        Journal of Financial and Quantitative Analysis,




        Vol.  X, No.  2 (June 1975), pp.  231 284.








[2]      Black, F.,  "Capital Market Equilibrium with Restricted




        Borrowing," Journal of Business,  July 1972, pp.  444-454








[3]      	,  Jensen, J., and Scholes, M.,  "The Capital




        Asset Pricing Model: Some Empirical Tests."  To  be




        published in Studies in the Theory of Capital Markets,




        Edited by Michael Jensen.  (New York: Praeger, 1972),




        pp.  79-121.








[4]      Gonedes, N.  J.,  "Evidence on  the Information Content




        of Accounting Numbers: Accounting-Based and Market-




        Based Estimates  of Systematic  Risk," The Journal of




        Financial and Quantitative Analysis, VIII (June  1973),




        pp.  407-444.








[5]               ,  "A Note on Accounting-Based and Market-




        Based Estimates  of Systematic  Risk," Journal of




        Financial and Quantitative Analysis, Vol. X, No. 2




        (June 1975) , pp.  355-366.





                         R-l

-------
 [6]      Hamada,  R.,  "Portfolio Analysis,  Market Equilibrium




         and Corporate  Finance," Journal of Finance,  XXIV




         (March 1969) ,  pp.  13-31.








 [7]      	,  "The  Effect of the  Firm's  Capital Structure




         on the Systematic  Risk of Common  Stocks," The Journal




         of Finance,  XXVII  (May 1972),  pp.  433-452.








 [8]      Higgins,  R.  C.,  "Growth Dividend  Policy and  Capital




         Costs  in  the  Electric  Utility  Industry," The Journal




         of Finance,  September  1974,  pp.  1189-1201.








 [9]      Lintner,  J. ,  "The  Valuation  of Risk Assets  and the




         Selection of  Risky Investment  in  Stock Portfolios




         and Capital  Budgets,"  Review of Economics and




         Statistics,  47(February 1965),  pp.  10-31.








[10]      Litzenberger,  R. H.,  and  Budd,  A.  P.,  "Corporate




         Investment  Criteria  and the  Valuation  of Risk Assets,"




         Journal  of  Finance and Quantitative Analysis, December




         1970,  pp. 395-419.








[11]      	,  and Rao,  C.  U., "Estimates  of the Marginal




         Rate of  Time  Preference and  Average Risk Aversion  of




         Investors in  Electric  Utility  Industry Shares 1960-66,"




         Bell Journal  of  Economics and  Management Science,




         Spring 1971,  pp. 265-277.





                         R-2

-------
[12]     McDonald,  J.  G., "Required Rates of Return on Public




        Utility Equities: A National and Regional Analysis,




        1958-1969," The Bell Journal of Economics and




        Management Science, Autumn 1971, pp.  503-514.








[13]     Miller, M. H., and Modigliani, F., "Dividend Policy,




        Growth and the Valuation of Shares,"  The Journal of




        Business,  October 1961, pp. 411-433.








[14]     	, and Modigliani, F., "Some  Estimates of




        the Cost of Capital to the Electric Utility Industry,"




        American Economic Review.,  June 1966,  pp. 333-391.








[15]     Modigliani, R. , and Mller, M.  H. ,  "The Cost of




        Capital, Corporation Finance and the  Theory of




        Investment," American Economic Review., 48(June 1958),




        pp. 261 297.








[16]     	, and Pogue, G.,  "An Introduction to Risk




        and Return," Financial Analysts Journal, March/April,




        pp. 2-14;  May/June, pp. 3-20.








[17]     Mossin, J. , "Equilibrium in a Capital Asset Market,"




        Econometrica,  34(October 1966), pp. 768-783.
                          R-3

-------
[18]     Myers,  S.  C.,  "What  Was  AT&T's  Cost of Capital in



        Early  1971,"  unpublished manuscript,  MIT,  Sloan



        School,  September 1971.








[19]     	,  "The  Application of  Finance Theory to



        Public  Utility Rate  Cases," The Bell  Journal of



        Economics  and Management Science,  Vol.  3,  No.  1



        (Spring  1972), pp.  58-97.








[20]     	,  and Pogue,  G.  A.,  "An Evaluation of the



        Risk of  COMSAT Common  Stock," unpublished  testimony



        delivered  before the Federal  Communications Commission








[21]     	,  "Interactions of Corporate Financing and



        Investment  Decisions—Implications for Capital



        Budgeting," The  Journal  of Finance, Vol.  XXIX, No. 1



        (March  1974) ,  pp.  1-25.








[22]     	,  "The  Relationship  Between  Real  and



        Financial  Measures  of  Risk and  Return," presented at



        the AT§T conference  on Risk and Return, Vail,



        Colorado,  August 1973.   Forthcoming in the conference



        proceedings (J.  M.  Bicksler,  Editor).
                          R-4

-------
[23]     Myers,  S.  C. ,  "Optimal  Capital  Structure," Teaching



        Note tf3,  unpublished manuscript,  Sloan School  of



        Management, MIT, Fall 1973.   Copyright 1975 by



        Prof.  S.  C. Myers.








[24]     	,  "Interaction of Investment and Financing



        Decisions," Teaching Note #5, unpublished manuscript,



        Sloan School of Management,  MIT,  Fall 1973.  Copyright



        1975 by Prof.  S. C.  Myers.








[25]     Pogue,  Gerald A., "The Implications of Modern Finance



        Theory  for  Estimating the Cost  of Capital," unpublished



        Baruch  College Working Paper Number 34, August 1975.








[26]     Sharpe, W.  F., "Capital Asset Prices: A Theory of



        Market  Equilibrium Under Conditions of Risk,"



        Journal of  Finance,  XIX(September 1964), pp.  425-442.








[27]     Soloman,  E., "Alternative Rate  of Return Concepts



        and Their Implications for Utility Regulation,"



        The Bell  Journal of Economics and Management  Science,




        Spring  1970, pp. 65-81.








[28]     Wagner, W.  H., and Lau, S. C.,  "The Effect of Diversi



        fication  on Risk," 'Financial Analysts Journal,




        November-December 1971, pp.  48-53.






                          R-5

-------